Index: bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex |
=================================================================== |
--- bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex (revision 0) |
+++ bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex (revision 0) |
@@ -0,0 +1,9172 @@ |
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
+% |
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. |
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi |
+% |
+\def\texinfoversion{2008-12-03.17} |
+% |
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, |
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, |
+% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
+% |
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or |
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
+% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the |
+% License, or (at your option) any later version. |
+% |
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
+% General Public License for more details. |
+% |
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
+% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
+% |
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without |
+% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) |
+% |
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug |
+% reports; you can get the latest version from: |
+% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
+% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
+% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out |
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
+% |
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the |
+% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. |
+% |
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the |
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple |
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: |
+% tex foo.texi |
+% texindex foo.?? |
+% tex foo.texi |
+% tex foo.texi |
+% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. |
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. |
+% |
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
+% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the |
+% full Texinfo distribution. |
+% |
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. |
+ |
+ |
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} |
+ |
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number |
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because |
+% they might have appeared in the input file name. |
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% |
+ \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} |
+ |
+ |
+\chardef\other=12 |
+ |
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. |
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. |
+\let\+ = \relax |
+ |
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. |
+\let\ptexb=\b |
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
+\let\ptexc=\c |
+\let\ptexcomma=\, |
+\let\ptexdot=\. |
+\let\ptexdots=\dots |
+\let\ptexend=\end |
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv |
+\let\ptexexclam=\! |
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
+\let\ptexgtr=> |
+\let\ptexhat=^ |
+\let\ptexi=\i |
+\let\ptexindent=\indent |
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert |
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
+\let\ptexless=< |
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite |
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent |
+\let\ptexplus=+ |
+\let\ptexrbrace=\} |
+\let\ptexslash=\/ |
+\let\ptexstar=\* |
+\let\ptext=\t |
+\let\ptextop=\top |
+{\catcode`\'=\active |
+\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex. |
+ |
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it |
+% starts a new line in the output. |
+\newlinechar = `^^J |
+ |
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. |
+% |
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined |
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. |
+\else |
+ \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} |
+\fi |
+ |
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi |
+% |
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi |
+% |
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi |
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi |
+ |
+% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. |
+\chardef\spacecat = 10 |
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} |
+ |
+% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. |
+\chardef\colonChar = `\: |
+\chardef\commaChar = `\, |
+\chardef\dashChar = `\- |
+\chardef\dotChar = `\. |
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\! |
+\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` |
+\chardef\questChar = `\? |
+\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' |
+\chardef\semiChar = `\; |
+\chardef\underChar = `\_ |
+ |
+% Ignore a token. |
+% |
+\def\gobble#1{} |
+ |
+% The following is used inside several \edef's. |
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} |
+ |
+% Hyphenation fixes. |
+\hyphenation{ |
+ Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script |
+ ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps |
+ data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script |
+ man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm |
+ par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces |
+ spell-ing spell-ings |
+ stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space |
+ wide-spread wrap-around |
+} |
+ |
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
+\newdimen\bindingoffset |
+\newdimen\normaloffset |
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
+ |
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided |
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). |
+% |
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
+ |
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should |
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the |
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would |
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main |
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). |
+% |
+\def\|{% |
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. |
+ \leavevmode |
+ % |
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. |
+ \vadjust{% |
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current |
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. |
+ \vskip-\baselineskip |
+ % |
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So |
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. |
+ \llap{% |
+ % |
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. |
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt |
+ % |
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text. |
+ \hskip 12pt |
+ }% |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
+% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, |
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log |
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. |
+% |
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
+\def\loggingall{% |
+ \tracingstats2 |
+ \tracingpages1 |
+ \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex |
+ \tracingparagraphs1 |
+ \tracingoutput1 |
+ \tracingmacros2 |
+ \tracingrestores1 |
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen |
+ \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging |
+ \tracingscantokens1 |
+ \tracingifs1 |
+ \tracinggroups1 |
+ \tracingnesting2 |
+ \tracingassigns1 |
+ \fi |
+ \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex |
+ \errorcontextlines16 |
+}% |
+ |
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing |
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. |
+% |
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount |
+ \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} |
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount |
+ \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} |
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount |
+ \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} |
+ |
+% For @cropmarks command. |
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. |
+% |
+\newif\ifcropmarks |
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue |
+% |
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. |
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
+% |
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines |
+\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc |
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt |
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in |
+ |
+% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. |
+% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. |
+% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. |
+% |
+% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. |
+% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. |
+% |
+% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter |
+% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top |
+% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is |
+% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two |
+% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and |
+% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... |
+\def\domark{% |
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% |
+ \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% |
+ \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% |
+ \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% |
+ \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% |
+ \mark{% |
+ \the\toks0 \the\toks2 |
+ \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 |
+ \noexpand\else \the\toks8 |
+ }% |
+} |
+% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title |
+% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us |
+% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., |
+% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very |
+% first @chapter. |
+\def\gettopheadingmarks{% |
+ \ifcase0\topmark\fi |
+ \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi |
+} |
+\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} |
+\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} |
+ |
+% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. |
+\def\lastchapterdefs{} |
+\def\lastsectiondefs{} |
+\def\prevchapterdefs{} |
+\def\prevsectiondefs{} |
+\def\lastcolordefs{} |
+ |
+% Main output routine. |
+\chardef\PAGE = 255 |
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
+ |
+\newbox\headlinebox |
+\newbox\footlinebox |
+ |
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. |
+\def\onepageout#1{% |
+ \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi |
+ % |
+ \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
+ \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
+ % |
+ % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in |
+ % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). |
+ \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi |
+ \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
+ \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi |
+ \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
+ % |
+ {% |
+ % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to |
+ % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends |
+ % before the \shipout runs. |
+ % |
+ \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. |
+ \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if |
+ % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
+ % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: |
+ % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} |
+ % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; |
+ % it needs to be |
+ % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} |
+ \shipout\vbox{% |
+ % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. |
+ \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi |
+ % |
+ \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup |
+ \hsize = \outerhsize |
+ \vskip-\topandbottommargin |
+ \vtop to0pt{% |
+ \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% |
+ \nointerlineskip |
+ \line{% |
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% |
+ \hfill |
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% |
+ }% |
+ \vss}% |
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin |
+ \line\bgroup |
+ \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. |
+ \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
+ \vbox\bgroup |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \unvbox\headlinebox |
+ \pagebody{#1}% |
+ \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt |
+ % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. |
+ % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) |
+ % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. |
+ \vskip 24pt |
+ \unvbox\footlinebox |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \ifcropmarks |
+ \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup |
+ \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup |
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
+ \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick |
+ \vbox to0pt{\vss |
+ \line{% |
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
+ \hfill |
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
+ }% |
+ \nointerlineskip |
+ \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% |
+ }% |
+ \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause |
+ \fi |
+ }% end of \shipout\vbox |
+ }% end of group with \indexdummies |
+ \advancepageno |
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi |
+} |
+ |
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
+ |
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} |
+{\catcode`\@ =11 |
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi |
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) |
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present |
+ \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi |
+\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax |
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi |
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
+} |
+ |
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
+% |
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} |
+\def\nstop{\vbox |
+ {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} |
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} |
+\def\nsbot{\vbox |
+ {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} |
+ |
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of |
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a |
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. |
+% |
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{% |
+ \def\argtorun{#2}% |
+ \begingroup |
+ \obeylines |
+ \spaceisspace |
+ #1% |
+ \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. |
+} |
+ |
+{\obeylines % |
+ \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% |
+ \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. |
+ \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} |
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} |
+ |
+% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. |
+% |
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., |
+% @end itemize @c foo |
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
+% by \finishparsearg. |
+% |
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} |
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} |
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% |
+ \def\temp{#3}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty |
+ % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: |
+ \let\temp\finishparsearg |
+ \else |
+ \let\temp\argcheckspaces |
+ \fi |
+ % Put the space token in: |
+ \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm |
+} |
+ |
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so |
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. |
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, |
+% just before passing the control to \argtorun. |
+% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is |
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger |
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped. |
+% |
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. |
+% |
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} |
+ |
+% \parseargdef\foo{...} |
+% is roughly equivalent to |
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} |
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...} |
+% |
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my |
+% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 |
+ |
+\def\parseargdef#1{% |
+ \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% |
+} |
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% |
+ \def#2{\parsearg#1}% |
+ \def#1##1% |
+} |
+ |
+% Several utility definitions with active space: |
+{ |
+ \obeyspaces |
+ \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
+ |
+ % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword |
+ % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this |
+ % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input |
+ % should produce a line of output anyway. |
+ % |
+ \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} |
+ |
+ % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces |
+ % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the |
+ % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). |
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} |
+ |
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
+% |
+% \envdef\foo{...} |
+% \def\Efoo{...} |
+% |
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the |
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also |
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks |
+% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be |
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. |
+% |
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they |
+% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The |
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this |
+% special case.) |
+ |
+ |
+% At run-time, environments start with this: |
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} |
+% initialize |
+\let\thisenv\empty |
+ |
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': |
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} |
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} |
+ |
+% Check whether we're in the right environment: |
+\def\checkenv#1{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp |
+ \else |
+ \badenverr |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: |
+\def\badenverr{% |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, |
+ not \inenvironment\thisenv}% |
+} |
+\def\inenvironment#1{% |
+ \ifx#1\empty |
+ out of any environment% |
+ \else |
+ in environment \expandafter\string#1% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. |
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv |
+% |
+\parseargdef\end{% |
+ \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname |
+ \else |
+ % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 |
+ \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname |
+ \csname E#1\endcsname |
+ \endgroup |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
+ |
+ |
+%% Simple single-character @ commands |
+ |
+% @@ prints an @ |
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}} |
+ |
+% This is turned off because it was never documented |
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' |
+%% but suppressing ligatures. |
+%\def\`{{`}} |
+%\def\'{{'}} |
+ |
+% Used to generate quoted braces. |
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} |
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} |
+\let\{=\mylbrace |
+\let\}=\myrbrace |
+\begingroup |
+ % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
+ % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. |
+ \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other |
+ \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
+ \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
+ !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% |
+ !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% |
+ !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% |
+ !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% |
+!endgroup |
+ |
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. |
+\let\comma = , |
+ |
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent |
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
+\let\, = \c |
+\let\dotaccent = \. |
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} |
+\let\tieaccent = \t |
+\let\ubaraccent = \b |
+\let\udotaccent = \d |
+ |
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. |
+\def\questiondown{?`} |
+\def\exclamdown{!`} |
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} |
+ |
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. |
+\def\imacro{i} |
+\def\jmacro{j} |
+\def\dotless#1{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi |
+ \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi |
+ \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% |
+ \fi\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
+% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) |
+% |
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } |
+ |
+% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in |
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most |
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using |
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and |
+% \scriptscriptstyle). |
+% |
+\def\LaTeX{% |
+ L\kern-.36em |
+ {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% |
+ \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% |
+ \kern-.15em |
+ \TeX |
+} |
+ |
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
+{\catcode`@ = 11 |
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble |
+ % if the definition is written into an index file. |
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M |
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } |
+} |
+ |
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
+ |
+% @* forces a line break. |
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} |
+ |
+% @/ allows a line break. |
+\let\/=\allowbreak |
+ |
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
+ |
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
+ |
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
+ |
+% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. |
+% |
+\def\onword{on} |
+\def\offword{off} |
+% |
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing |
+ \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing |
+ \else |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% |
+ \fi\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. |
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} |
+ |
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing |
+% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box |
+% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for |
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is |
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, |
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and |
+% the text is small, which looks bad. |
+% |
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it |
+% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an |
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The |
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit |
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). |
+% |
+\newbox\groupbox |
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7} |
+% |
+\envdef\group{% |
+ \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else |
+ \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
+ \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% |
+ \fi |
+ \startsavinginserts |
+ % |
+ \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup |
+ % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
+ % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an |
+ % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after |
+ % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group |
+ % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo |
+ % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. |
+ \comment |
+} |
+% |
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) |
+% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space |
+% above. But it's pretty close. |
+\def\Egroup{% |
+ % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group |
+ % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. |
+ \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. |
+ \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth |
+ \egroup % End the \vtop. |
+ % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. |
+ \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox |
+ % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). |
+ \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal |
+ % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big |
+ % group, force a page break. |
+ \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 |
+ \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight |
+ \page |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \box\groupbox |
+ \prevdepth = \dimen1 |
+ \checkinserts |
+} |
+% |
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. |
+% |
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% |
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% |
+where each line of input produces a line of output.} |
+ |
+% @need space-in-mils |
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. |
+ |
+\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in |
+ |
+% Old definition--didn't work. |
+%\parseargdef\need{\par % |
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
+%{\baselineskip=0pt% |
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak |
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt |
+%}} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\need{% |
+ % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
+ % paragraph. |
+ \par |
+ % |
+ % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. |
+ \dimen0 = #1\mil |
+ \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox |
+ \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox |
+ \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 |
+ % |
+ % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the |
+ % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. |
+ % And a page break here is fine. |
+ \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% |
+ % |
+ % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the |
+ % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the |
+ % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider |
+ % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the |
+ % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. |
+ % |
+ % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the |
+ % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in |
+ % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which |
+ % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing |
+ % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an |
+ % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real |
+ % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. |
+ \penalty9999 |
+ % |
+ % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. |
+ \kern -#1\mil |
+ % |
+ % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. |
+ \nobreak |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
+ |
+\let\br = \par |
+ |
+% @page forces the start of a new page. |
+% |
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
+ |
+% @exdent text.... |
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin |
+ |
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. |
+% That's how much \exdent should take out. |
+\newskip\exdentamount |
+ |
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. |
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
+ |
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. |
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
+ \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} |
+ |
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current |
+% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion |
+% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. |
+% |
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm |
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} |
+% |
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% |
+ \nobreak |
+ \kern-\strutdepth |
+ \vtop to \strutdepth{% |
+ \baselineskip=\strutdepth |
+ \vss |
+ % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to |
+ % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. |
+ \ifx#1l% |
+ \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% |
+ \else |
+ \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% |
+ \fi |
+ \null |
+ }% |
+}} |
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} |
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} |
+% |
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} |
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; |
+% else use TEXT for both). |
+% |
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} |
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts |
+ \def\righttext{#2}% |
+ \else |
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text |
+ \def\righttext{#1}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \ifodd\pageno |
+ \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin |
+ \else |
+ \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% |
+ \fi |
+ \temp |
+} |
+ |
+% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. |
+% |
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} |
+\def\includezzz#1{% |
+ \pushthisfilestack |
+ \def\thisfile{#1}% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. |
+ \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion |
+ \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% |
+ % |
+ % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes |
+ % definitions, etc. |
+ \expandafter |
+ }\temp |
+ \popthisfilestack |
+} |
+\def\filenamecatcodes{% |
+ \catcode`\\=\other |
+ \catcode`~=\other |
+ \catcode`^=\other |
+ \catcode`_=\other |
+ \catcode`|=\other |
+ \catcode`<=\other |
+ \catcode`>=\other |
+ \catcode`+=\other |
+ \catcode`-=\other |
+ \catcode`\`=\other |
+ \catcode`\'=\other |
+} |
+ |
+\def\pushthisfilestack{% |
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm |
+} |
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{% |
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm |
+} |
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% |
+ \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% |
+} |
+ |
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} |
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: |
+ the stack of filenames is empty.}} |
+ |
+\def\thisfile{} |
+ |
+% @center line |
+% outputs that line, centered. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\center{% |
+ \ifhmode |
+ \let\next\centerH |
+ \else |
+ \let\next\centerV |
+ \fi |
+ \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% |
+} |
+\def\centerH#1{% |
+ {% |
+ \hfil\break |
+ \advance\hsize by -\leftskip |
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
+ \line{#1}% |
+ \break |
+ }% |
+} |
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} |
+ |
+% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space |
+ |
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
+ |
+% @comment ...line which is ignored... |
+% @c is the same as @comment |
+% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
+ |
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% |
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% |
+\commentxxx} |
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} |
+ |
+\let\c=\comment |
+ |
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS |
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. |
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. |
+% |
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
+\def\noneword{none} |
+% |
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\asisword |
+ \else |
+ \ifx\temp\noneword |
+ \defaultparindent = 0pt |
+ \else |
+ \defaultparindent = #1em |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent |
+} |
+ |
+% @exampleindent NCHARS |
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. |
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but |
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. |
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\asisword |
+ \else |
+ \ifx\temp\noneword |
+ \lispnarrowing = 0pt |
+ \else |
+ \lispnarrowing = #1em |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD |
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph |
+% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such |
+% paragraphs. |
+% |
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling |
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. |
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. |
+% By default, we suppress indentation. |
+% |
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} |
+\def\insertword{insert} |
+% |
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\noneword |
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent |
+ \else\ifx\temp\insertword |
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax |
+ \else |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% |
+ \fi\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to |
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. |
+% |
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next |
+% paragraph. |
+% |
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% |
+ \gdef\indent{% |
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent |
+ \indent |
+ }% |
+ \gdef\noindent{% |
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent |
+ \noindent |
+ }% |
+ \global\everypar = {% |
+ \kern -\parindent |
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% |
+ \global \let \indent = \ptexindent |
+ \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent |
+ \global \everypar = {}% |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
+% |
+\def\asis#1{#1} |
+ |
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
+% |
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean |
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make |
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, |
+% which is what @var uses. |
+{ |
+ \catcode`\_ = \active |
+ \gdef\mathunderscore{% |
+ \catcode`\_=\active |
+ \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% |
+ } |
+} |
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but |
+% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not |
+% otherwise define @\. |
+% |
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} |
+% |
+\def\math{% |
+ \tex |
+ \mathunderscore |
+ \let\\ = \mathbackslash |
+ \mathactive |
+ % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode |
+ \let\"=\ddot |
+ \let\'=\acute |
+ \let\==\bar |
+ \let\^=\hat |
+ \let\`=\grave |
+ \let\u=\breve |
+ \let\v=\check |
+ \let\~=\tilde |
+ \let\dotaccent=\dot |
+ $\finishmath |
+} |
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. |
+ |
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. |
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument |
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). |
+% |
+{ |
+ \catcode`^ = \active |
+ \catcode`< = \active |
+ \catcode`> = \active |
+ \catcode`+ = \active |
+ \catcode`' = \active |
+ \gdef\mathactive{% |
+ \let^ = \ptexhat |
+ \let< = \ptexless |
+ \let> = \ptexgtr |
+ \let+ = \ptexplus |
+ \let' = \ptexquoteright |
+ } |
+} |
+ |
+% Some math mode symbols. |
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
+\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} |
+\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} |
+\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} |
+ |
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. |
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm |
+% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, |
+% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do |
+% whichever is larger. |
+% |
+\def\dots{% |
+ \leavevmode |
+ \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods |
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em |
+ \dimen0 = \wd0 |
+ \else |
+ \dimen0 = 1.5em |
+ \fi |
+ \hbox to \dimen0{% |
+ \hskip 0pt plus.25fil |
+ .\hskip 0pt plus1fil |
+ .\hskip 0pt plus1fil |
+ .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
+% |
+\def\enddots{% |
+ \dots |
+ \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor |
+} |
+ |
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up |
+% Texinfo's parsing. |
+% |
+\let\comma = , |
+ |
+% @refill is a no-op. |
+\let\refill=\relax |
+ |
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to |
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. |
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). |
+% |
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. |
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse |
+ |
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
+\def\setfilename{% |
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
+ \iflinks |
+ \tryauxfile |
+ % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. |
+ \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux |
+ \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
+ \openindices |
+ \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
+ % |
+ % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. |
+ % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. |
+ \openin 1 texinfo.cnf |
+ \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+ % |
+ \comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
+} |
+ |
+% Called from \setfilename. |
+% |
+\def\openindices{% |
+ \newindex{cp}% |
+ \newcodeindex{fn}% |
+ \newcodeindex{vr}% |
+ \newcodeindex{tp}% |
+ \newcodeindex{ky}% |
+ \newcodeindex{pg}% |
+} |
+ |
+% @bye. |
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{pdf,} |
+% adobe `portable' document format |
+\newcount\tempnum |
+\newcount\lnkcount |
+\newtoks\filename |
+\newcount\filenamelength |
+\newcount\pgn |
+\newtoks\toksA |
+\newtoks\toksB |
+\newtoks\toksC |
+\newtoks\toksD |
+\newbox\boxA |
+\newcount\countA |
+\newif\ifpdf |
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest |
+ |
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
+% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, |
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. |
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
+\else |
+ \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
+ \else |
+ \ifcase\pdfoutput |
+ \else |
+ \pdftrue |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+\fi |
+ |
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, |
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to |
+% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be |
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. |
+% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html |
+% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX |
+% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so |
+% that's what we do). |
+ |
+% double active backslashes. |
+% |
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active |
+ @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% |
+ @catcode`@\=@active |
+ @let\=@doublebackslash} |
+} |
+ |
+% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are |
+% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as |
+% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor |
+% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission |
+% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. |
+% |
+% #1 is the tokens to replace. |
+% #2 is the replacement. |
+% #3 is the control sequence with the string. |
+% |
+\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% |
+ \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% |
+ ##1% |
+ \ifx\\##2\\% |
+ \else |
+ #2% |
+ \HyReturnAfterFi{% |
+ \HyPsdReplace##2\END |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ }% |
+ \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% |
+} |
+\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} |
+ |
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. |
+\def\backslashparens#1{% |
+ \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply |
+ % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. |
+ \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% |
+ \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% |
+} |
+ |
+\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images |
+with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot |
+be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI |
+output) for that.)} |
+ |
+\ifpdf |
+ % |
+ % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. |
+ \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} |
+ \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} |
+ % |
+ \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} |
+ % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, |
+ % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. |
+ \def\setcolor#1{% |
+ \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% |
+ \domark |
+ \pdfsetcolor{#1}% |
+ } |
+ % |
+ \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} |
+ \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} |
+ \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} |
+ \def\lastcolordefs{} |
+ % |
+ \def\makefootline{% |
+ \baselineskip24pt |
+ \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% |
+ } |
+ % |
+ \def\makeheadline{% |
+ \vbox to 0pt{% |
+ \vskip-22.5pt |
+ \line{% |
+ \vbox to8.5pt{}% |
+ % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. |
+ \getcolormarks |
+ % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. |
+ \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% |
+ }% |
+ \vss |
+ }% |
+ \nointerlineskip |
+ } |
+ % |
+ % |
+ \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} |
+ % |
+ % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). |
+ \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
+ \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
+ \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
+ % |
+ % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among |
+ % others). Let's try in that order. |
+ \let\pdfimgext=\empty |
+ \begingroup |
+ \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 |
+ \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 |
+ \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 |
+ \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 |
+ \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 |
+ \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 |
+ \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp |
+ \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+ \endgroup |
+ % |
+ % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
+ % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) |
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
+ \immediate\pdfimage |
+ \else |
+ \immediate\pdfximage |
+ \fi |
+ \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi |
+ \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi |
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 |
+ #1.\pdfimgext |
+ \else |
+ {#1.\pdfimgext}% |
+ \fi |
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else |
+ \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage |
+ \fi} |
+ % |
+ \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% |
+ % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters |
+ % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ \activebackslashdouble |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \def\pdfdestname{#1}% |
+ \backslashparens\pdfdestname |
+ \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% |
+ }} |
+ % |
+ % used to mark target names; must be expandable. |
+ \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} |
+ % |
+ % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as |
+ % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. |
+ \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} |
+ \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} |
+ \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} |
+ % |
+ % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines |
+ % come from Petr Olsak |
+ \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% |
+ \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} |
+ \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax |
+ \advance\tempnum by 1 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
+ % |
+ % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the |
+ % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number |
+ % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, |
+ % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. |
+ % #4 is the page number |
+ % |
+ \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% |
+ % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the |
+ % page number. We could generate a destination for the section |
+ % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't |
+ % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. |
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% |
+ \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty |
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% |
+ \else |
+ % Doubled backslashes in the name. |
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% |
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Also double the backslashes in the display string. |
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% |
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% |
+ % |
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% |
+ } |
+ % |
+ \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
+ \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
+ \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace |
+ % |
+ % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. |
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \def\thischapnum{##2}% |
+ \def\thissecnum{0}% |
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
+ }% |
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% |
+ \def\thissecnum{##2}% |
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
+ }% |
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% |
+ \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% |
+ }% |
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% |
+ }% |
+ \def\thischapnum{0}% |
+ \def\thissecnum{0}% |
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
+ % |
+ % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et |
+ % al. a second time, below. |
+ \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% |
+ \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% |
+ \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% |
+ \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% |
+ \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% |
+ \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% |
+ \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% |
+ \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% |
+ \readdatafile{toc}% |
+ % |
+ % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. |
+ % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of |
+ % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. |
+ % |
+ % We use the node names as the destinations. |
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero |
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% |
+ % |
+ % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of |
+ % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, |
+ % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from |
+ % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from |
+ % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. |
+ % |
+ % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to |
+ % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right |
+ % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \setupdatafile |
+ \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash |
+ \input \tocreadfilename |
+ \endgroup |
+ } |
+ % |
+ \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
+ \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax |
+ \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces |
+ \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% |
+ \advance\filenamelength by 1 |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \nextsp} |
+ \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} |
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
+ \let \startlink \pdfannotlink |
+ \else |
+ \let \startlink \pdfstartlink |
+ \fi |
+ % make a live url in pdf output. |
+ \def\pdfurl#1{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not |
+ % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context |
+ % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one |
+ % people have actually reported a problem with. |
+ % |
+ \normalturnoffactive |
+ \def\@{@}% |
+ \let\/=\empty |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% |
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
+ user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% |
+ \endgroup} |
+ \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} |
+ \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} |
+ \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} |
+ \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} |
+ \def\maketoks{% |
+ \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax |
+ \ifx\first0\adn0 |
+ \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 |
+ \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 |
+ \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
+ \else |
+ \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi |
+ \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else |
+ \let\next=\maketoks |
+ \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} |
+ \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi |
+ \fi |
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
+ \next} |
+ \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% |
+ {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} |
+ \def\pdflink#1{% |
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} |
+ \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} |
+ \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} |
+\else |
+ % non-pdf mode |
+ \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble |
+ \let\pdfurl = \gobble |
+ \let\endlink = \relax |
+ \let\setcolor = \gobble |
+ \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble |
+ \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax |
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput |
+ |
+ |
+\message{fonts,} |
+ |
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. |
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in |
+% italics, not bold italics. |
+% |
+\def\setfontstyle#1{% |
+ \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. |
+ \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font |
+} |
+ |
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style. |
+% |
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} |
+ |
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} |
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} |
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} |
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} |
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} |
+ |
+% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since |
+% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. |
+\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} |
+ |
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
+% So we set up a \sf. |
+\newfam\sffam |
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
+ |
+% We don't need math for this font style. |
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} |
+ |
+ |
+% Default leading. |
+\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt |
+ |
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size |
+% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers |
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. |
+% |
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} |
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} |
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} |
+% |
+% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. |
+\def\baselinefactor{1} |
+% |
+\def\setleading#1{% |
+ \dimen0 = #1\relax |
+ \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 |
+ \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip |
+ \normalbaselines |
+ \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% |
+ \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip |
+ depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. |
+% |
+% do nothing with this by default. |
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble |
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble |
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble |
+ |
+% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. |
+% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run |
+% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) |
+\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else |
+ \begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) |
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) |
+%%Version: 1.000 |
+%%EndComments |
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
+12 dict begin |
+begincmap |
+/CIDSystemInfo |
+<< /Registry (TeX) |
+/Ordering (OT1) |
+/Supplement 0 |
+>> def |
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def |
+/CMapType 2 def |
+1 begincodespacerange |
+<00> <7F> |
+endcodespacerange |
+8 beginbfrange |
+<00> <01> <0393> |
+<09> <0A> <03A8> |
+<23> <26> <0023> |
+<28> <3B> <0028> |
+<3F> <5B> <003F> |
+<5D> <5E> <005D> |
+<61> <7A> <0061> |
+<7B> <7C> <2013> |
+endbfrange |
+40 beginbfchar |
+<02> <0398> |
+<03> <039B> |
+<04> <039E> |
+<05> <03A0> |
+<06> <03A3> |
+<07> <03D2> |
+<08> <03A6> |
+<0B> <00660066> |
+<0C> <00660069> |
+<0D> <0066006C> |
+<0E> <006600660069> |
+<0F> <00660066006C> |
+<10> <0131> |
+<11> <0237> |
+<12> <0060> |
+<13> <00B4> |
+<14> <02C7> |
+<15> <02D8> |
+<16> <00AF> |
+<17> <02DA> |
+<18> <00B8> |
+<19> <00DF> |
+<1A> <00E6> |
+<1B> <0153> |
+<1C> <00F8> |
+<1D> <00C6> |
+<1E> <0152> |
+<1F> <00D8> |
+<21> <0021> |
+<22> <201D> |
+<27> <2019> |
+<3C> <00A1> |
+<3D> <003D> |
+<3E> <00BF> |
+<5C> <201C> |
+<5F> <02D9> |
+<60> <2018> |
+<7D> <02DD> |
+<7E> <007E> |
+<7F> <00A8> |
+endbfchar |
+endcmap |
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
+end |
+end |
+%%EndResource |
+%%EOF |
+ }\endgroup |
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% |
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
+ }% |
+% |
+% \cmapOT1IT |
+ \begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) |
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) |
+%%Version: 1.000 |
+%%EndComments |
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
+12 dict begin |
+begincmap |
+/CIDSystemInfo |
+<< /Registry (TeX) |
+/Ordering (OT1IT) |
+/Supplement 0 |
+>> def |
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def |
+/CMapType 2 def |
+1 begincodespacerange |
+<00> <7F> |
+endcodespacerange |
+8 beginbfrange |
+<00> <01> <0393> |
+<09> <0A> <03A8> |
+<25> <26> <0025> |
+<28> <3B> <0028> |
+<3F> <5B> <003F> |
+<5D> <5E> <005D> |
+<61> <7A> <0061> |
+<7B> <7C> <2013> |
+endbfrange |
+42 beginbfchar |
+<02> <0398> |
+<03> <039B> |
+<04> <039E> |
+<05> <03A0> |
+<06> <03A3> |
+<07> <03D2> |
+<08> <03A6> |
+<0B> <00660066> |
+<0C> <00660069> |
+<0D> <0066006C> |
+<0E> <006600660069> |
+<0F> <00660066006C> |
+<10> <0131> |
+<11> <0237> |
+<12> <0060> |
+<13> <00B4> |
+<14> <02C7> |
+<15> <02D8> |
+<16> <00AF> |
+<17> <02DA> |
+<18> <00B8> |
+<19> <00DF> |
+<1A> <00E6> |
+<1B> <0153> |
+<1C> <00F8> |
+<1D> <00C6> |
+<1E> <0152> |
+<1F> <00D8> |
+<21> <0021> |
+<22> <201D> |
+<23> <0023> |
+<24> <00A3> |
+<27> <2019> |
+<3C> <00A1> |
+<3D> <003D> |
+<3E> <00BF> |
+<5C> <201C> |
+<5F> <02D9> |
+<60> <2018> |
+<7D> <02DD> |
+<7E> <007E> |
+<7F> <00A8> |
+endbfchar |
+endcmap |
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
+end |
+end |
+%%EndResource |
+%%EOF |
+ }\endgroup |
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% |
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
+ }% |
+% |
+% \cmapOT1TT |
+ \begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) |
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) |
+%%Version: 1.000 |
+%%EndComments |
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
+12 dict begin |
+begincmap |
+/CIDSystemInfo |
+<< /Registry (TeX) |
+/Ordering (OT1TT) |
+/Supplement 0 |
+>> def |
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def |
+/CMapType 2 def |
+1 begincodespacerange |
+<00> <7F> |
+endcodespacerange |
+5 beginbfrange |
+<00> <01> <0393> |
+<09> <0A> <03A8> |
+<21> <26> <0021> |
+<28> <5F> <0028> |
+<61> <7E> <0061> |
+endbfrange |
+32 beginbfchar |
+<02> <0398> |
+<03> <039B> |
+<04> <039E> |
+<05> <03A0> |
+<06> <03A3> |
+<07> <03D2> |
+<08> <03A6> |
+<0B> <2191> |
+<0C> <2193> |
+<0D> <0027> |
+<0E> <00A1> |
+<0F> <00BF> |
+<10> <0131> |
+<11> <0237> |
+<12> <0060> |
+<13> <00B4> |
+<14> <02C7> |
+<15> <02D8> |
+<16> <00AF> |
+<17> <02DA> |
+<18> <00B8> |
+<19> <00DF> |
+<1A> <00E6> |
+<1B> <0153> |
+<1C> <00F8> |
+<1D> <00C6> |
+<1E> <0152> |
+<1F> <00D8> |
+<20> <2423> |
+<27> <2019> |
+<60> <2018> |
+<7F> <00A8> |
+endbfchar |
+endcmap |
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
+end |
+end |
+%%EndResource |
+%%EOF |
+ }\endgroup |
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% |
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
+ }% |
+\fi\fi |
+ |
+ |
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap |
+% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass |
+% empty to omit). |
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% |
+ \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 |
+ \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% |
+} |
+% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. |
+\let\cmap\gobble |
+% emacs-page end of cmaps |
+ |
+% Use cm as the default font prefix. |
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix |
+% before you read in texinfo.tex. |
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined |
+\def\fontprefix{cm} |
+\fi |
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. |
+\def\rmshape{r} |
+\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold |
+\def\bfshape{b} |
+\def\bxshape{bx} |
+\def\ttshape{tt} |
+\def\ttbshape{tt} |
+\def\ttslshape{sltt} |
+\def\itshape{ti} |
+\def\itbshape{bxti} |
+\def\slshape{sl} |
+\def\slbshape{bxsl} |
+\def\sfshape{ss} |
+\def\sfbshape{ss} |
+\def\scshape{csc} |
+\def\scbshape{csc} |
+ |
+% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in |
+% Texinfo. |
+% |
+\def\definetextfontsizexi{% |
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt} |
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} |
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
+\def\textecsize{1095} |
+ |
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
+ |
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
+\font\smalli=cmmi9 |
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
+\def\smallecsize{0900} |
+ |
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} |
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
+\def\smallerecsize{0800} |
+ |
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm |
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
+\def\titleecsize{2074} |
+ |
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). |
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} |
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm |
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 |
+\def\chapecsize{1728} |
+ |
+% Section fonts (14.4pt). |
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\let\secbf\secrm |
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
+\def\sececsize{1440} |
+ |
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). |
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} |
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} |
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 |
+\def\ssececsize{1200} |
+ |
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). |
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} |
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10 |
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 |
+\def\reducedecsize{1000} |
+ |
+% reset the current fonts |
+\textfonts |
+\rm |
+} % end of 11pt text font size definitions |
+ |
+ |
+% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with |
+% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU |
+% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the |
+% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. |
+% |
+\def\definetextfontsizex{% |
+% Text fonts (10pt). |
+\def\textnominalsize{10pt} |
+\edef\mainmagstep{1000} |
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
+\def\textecsize{1000} |
+ |
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
+ |
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
+\font\smalli=cmmi9 |
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
+\def\smallecsize{0900} |
+ |
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} |
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
+\def\smallerecsize{0800} |
+ |
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm |
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
+\def\titleecsize{2074} |
+ |
+% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). |
+\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} |
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\let\chapbf\chaprm |
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
+\def\chapecsize{1440} |
+ |
+% Section fonts (12pt). |
+\def\secnominalsize{12pt} |
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
+\let\secbf\secrm |
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
+\font\seci=cmmi12 |
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
+\def\sececsize{1200} |
+ |
+% Subsection fonts (10pt). |
+\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} |
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
+\font\sseci=cmmi10 |
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 |
+\def\ssececsize{1000} |
+ |
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). |
+\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} |
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
+\font\reducedi=cmmi9 |
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 |
+\def\reducedecsize{0900} |
+ |
+% reduce space between paragraphs |
+\divide\parskip by 2 |
+ |
+% reset the current fonts |
+\textfonts |
+\rm |
+} % end of 10pt text font size definitions |
+ |
+ |
+% We provide the user-level command |
+% @fonttextsize 10 |
+% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. |
+% |
+\def\xword{10} |
+\def\xiword{11} |
+% |
+\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% |
+ \def\textsizearg{#1}% |
+ \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% |
+ % |
+ % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since |
+ % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. |
+ % |
+ \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
+ \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex |
+ \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi |
+ \else |
+ \errhelp=\EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} |
+ \fi\fi |
+ \endgroup |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and |
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). |
+% |
+\def\resetmathfonts{% |
+ \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
+ \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf |
+ \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf |
+} |
+ |
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
+% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
+% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire |
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. |
+% |
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) |
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in |
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. |
+% |
+% This all needs generalizing, badly. |
+% |
+\def\textfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\textttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{text}% |
+ \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} |
+\def\titlefonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl |
+ \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc |
+ \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{title}% |
+ \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} |
+\def\chapfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{chap}% |
+ \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
+\def\secfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc |
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\secttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{sec}% |
+ \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
+\def\subsecfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc |
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{ssec}% |
+ \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
+\def\reducedfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc |
+ \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{reduced}% |
+ \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
+\def\smallfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl |
+ \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc |
+ \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{small}% |
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
+\def\smallerfonts{% |
+ \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl |
+ \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc |
+ \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy |
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl |
+ \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} |
+ |
+% Fonts for short table of contents. |
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 |
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} |
+ |
+% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. |
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$} |
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$} |
+ |
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. |
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts |
+ |
+% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample |
+% can fit this many characters: |
+% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 |
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: |
+% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 |
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth |
+% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. |
+% |
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): |
+% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 |
+% --karl, 24jan03. |
+ |
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
+% |
+\definetextfontsizexi |
+ |
+ |
+\message{markup,} |
+ |
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
+% this property, we can check that font parameter. |
+% |
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
+ |
+% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will |
+% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. |
+% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost |
+% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles |
+% currently in effect. |
+\newif\ifmarkupvar |
+\newif\ifmarkupsamp |
+\newif\ifmarkupkey |
+%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. |
+%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. |
+\newif\ifmarkupcode |
+\newif\ifmarkupkbd |
+%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. |
+%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. |
+\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). |
+\newif\ifmarkupexample |
+\newif\ifmarkupverb |
+\newif\ifmarkupverbatim |
+ |
+\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty |
+ |
+\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% |
+ \csname markup#1true\endcsname |
+ \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% |
+ \markupstylesetup |
+} |
+ |
+\let\markupstylesetup\empty |
+ |
+\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% |
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup |
+ \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% |
+ \def#1% |
+} |
+ |
+% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. |
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% |
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname |
+ \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% |
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname |
+ \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi |
+} |
+ |
+{ |
+\catcode`\'=\active |
+\catcode`\`=\active |
+ |
+\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} |
+\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} |
+ |
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} |
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} |
+ |
+\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} |
+} |
+ |
+\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft |
+\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright |
+\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft |
+\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright |
+\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft |
+\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright |
+\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft |
+\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright |
+ |
+\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
+\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
+ |
+% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right |
+% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote |
+% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it |
+% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least |
+% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the |
+% regular 0x27. |
+% |
+\def\codequoteright{% |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
+ '% |
+ \else \char'15 \fi |
+ \else \char'15 \fi |
+} |
+% |
+% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. |
+% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like |
+% the code environments to do likewise. |
+% |
+\def\codequoteleft{% |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
+ % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 |
+ % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
+ \relax`% |
+ \else \char'22 \fi |
+ \else \char'22 \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
+\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} |
+ |
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
+ |
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans |
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic |
+ |
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
+ \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} |
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
+ |
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. |
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments. |
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
+ |
+% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want |
+% ttsl for book titles, do we? |
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
+ |
+\let\i=\smartitalic |
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted |
+\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}} |
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted |
+\let\emph=\smartitalic |
+ |
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. |
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
+ |
+% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. |
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
+\let\strong=\b |
+ |
+% @sansserif, explicit sans. |
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} |
+ |
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
+% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the |
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. |
+% |
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} |
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } |
+ |
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and |
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. |
+% |
+\catcode`@=11 |
+ \def\plainfrenchspacing{% |
+ \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m |
+ \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m |
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends |
+ } |
+ \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% |
+ \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 |
+ \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 |
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends |
+ } |
+\catcode`@=\other |
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default |
+ |
+% @t, explicit typewriter. |
+\def\t#1{% |
+ {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
+ \null |
+} |
+ |
+% @samp. |
+\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} |
+ |
+% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. |
+%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
+%\font\keysy=cmsy9 |
+%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
+% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
+% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
+% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% |
+% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
+% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} |
+ |
+% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already |
+% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But |
+% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. |
+% |
+\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key} |
+ \nohyphenation |
+ \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi |
+ #1}\null} |
+ |
+% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. |
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
+ |
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp. |
+\let\file=\samp |
+\let\option=\samp |
+ |
+% @code is a modification of @t, |
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
+\def\tclose#1{% |
+ {% |
+ % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. |
+ \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font |
+ % |
+ % Switch to typewriter. |
+ \tt |
+ % |
+ % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. |
+ \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% |
+ % |
+ % Turn off hyphenation. |
+ \nohyphenation |
+ % |
+ \rawbackslash |
+ \plainfrenchspacing |
+ #1% |
+ }% |
+ \null |
+} |
+ |
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. |
+ |
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control |
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. |
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) |
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. |
+% -- rms. |
+{ |
+ \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active |
+ \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active |
+ \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions |
+ % |
+ \global\def\code{\begingroup |
+ \setupmarkupstyle{code}% |
+ % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. |
+ \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active |
+ \ifallowcodebreaks |
+ \let-\codedash |
+ \let_\codeunder |
+ \else |
+ \let-\realdash |
+ \let_\realunder |
+ \fi |
+ \codex |
+ } |
+} |
+ |
+\def\realdash{-} |
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
+\def\codeunder{% |
+ % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ |
+ % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) |
+ % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us |
+ % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. |
+ \ifusingtt{\ifmmode |
+ \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. |
+ \else\normalunderscore \fi |
+ \discretionary{}{}{}}% |
+ {\_}% |
+} |
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
+ |
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., |
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in |
+% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in |
+% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. |
+% |
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue |
+ |
+\def\keywordtrue{true} |
+\def\keywordfalse{false} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% |
+ \def\txiarg{#1}% |
+ \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue |
+ \allowcodebreakstrue |
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse |
+ \allowcodebreaksfalse |
+ \else |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% |
+ \fi\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
+% then @kbd has no effect. |
+\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} |
+ |
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), |
+% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), |
+% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). |
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
+ \def\txiarg{#1}% |
+ \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct |
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample |
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode |
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
+ \else |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+} |
+\def\worddistinct{distinct} |
+\def\wordexample{example} |
+\def\wordcode{code} |
+ |
+% Default is `distinct'. |
+\kbdinputstyle distinct |
+ |
+\def\xkey{\key} |
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi |
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} |
+ |
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
+\let\indicateurl=\code |
+\let\env=\code |
+\let\command=\code |
+ |
+% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} |
+\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} |
+ |
+% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) |
+\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} |
+\def\click{\arrow} |
+ |
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) |
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third |
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url |
+% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in |
+% a hypertex \special here. |
+% |
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} |
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup |
+ \unsepspaces |
+ \pdfurl{#1}% |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
+ \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that |
+ \else |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
+ \ifpdf |
+ \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it |
+ \else |
+ \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \code{#1}% only url given, so show it |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \endlink |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
+% |
+\let\url=\uref |
+ |
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. |
+% |
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
+\ifpdf |
+ \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} |
+ \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup |
+ \unsepspaces |
+ \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
+ \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi |
+ \endlink |
+ \endgroup} |
+\else |
+ \let\email=\uref |
+\fi |
+ |
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. |
+% |
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
+ |
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', |
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for |
+% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. |
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} |
+ |
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for |
+% all-uppercase. |
+% |
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} |
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% |
+ {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% |
+ \def\temp{#2}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else |
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. |
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. |
+% |
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} |
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% |
+ {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
+ \def\temp{#2}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else |
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{glyphs,} |
+ |
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
+% |
+% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of |
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
+% |
+\def\point{$\star$} |
+\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} |
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
+ |
+% The @error{} command. |
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
+% |
+\newbox\errorbox |
+% |
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules |
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) |
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} |
+% |
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
+ \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
+ \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. |
+ \vbox{% |
+ \hrule height\dimen2 |
+ \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. |
+ \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. |
+ \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. |
+ \hrule height\dimen2} |
+ \hfil} |
+% |
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
+ |
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. |
+% |
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
+ |
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik |
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and |
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). |
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. |
+% |
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore |
+% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular |
+% font height. |
+% |
+% feymr - regular |
+% feymo - slanted |
+% feybr - bold |
+% feybo - bold slanted |
+% |
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. |
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. |
+% Hmm. |
+% |
+% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? |
+% Hope not. |
+% |
+% |
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} |
+\def\eurofont{% |
+ % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in |
+ % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that |
+ % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the |
+ % font installed. |
+ % |
+ % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale |
+ % that to the current nominal size. |
+ % |
+ % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but |
+ % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. |
+ % |
+ \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
+ % |
+ \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
+ % bold: |
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize |
+ \else |
+ % regular: |
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize |
+ \fi |
+ \thiseurofont |
+} |
+ |
+% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't |
+% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original |
+% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. |
+\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} |
+\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} |
+\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} |
+\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} |
+\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} |
+\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} |
+\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} |
+\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} |
+% |
+% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but |
+% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the |
+% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer |
+% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. |
+% |
+% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using |
+% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in |
+% the same EC font. |
+\def\ogonek#1{{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek |
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek |
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek |
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek |
+ \else |
+ \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% |
+ \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% |
+ \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi |
+ }% |
+} |
+\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} |
+\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} |
+\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} |
+\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} |
+% |
+\def\ecfont{% |
+ % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this |
+ % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German |
+ % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so |
+ % hopefully nobody will notice/care. |
+ \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% |
+ \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
+ \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
+ % bold: |
+ \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
+ \else |
+ % regular: |
+ \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
+ \fi |
+ \thisecfont |
+} |
+ |
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really |
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. |
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. |
+% |
+\def\registeredsymbol{% |
+ $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% |
+ \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% |
+ }$% |
+} |
+ |
+% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. |
+% |
+\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} |
+ |
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: |
+% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 |
+% so we'll define it if necessary. |
+% |
+\ifx\Orb\undefined |
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} |
+\fi |
+ |
+% Quotes. |
+\chardef\quotedblleft="5C |
+\chardef\quotedblright=`\" |
+\chardef\quoteleft=`\` |
+\chardef\quoteright=`\' |
+ |
+ |
+\message{page headings,} |
+ |
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in |
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
+ |
+% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
+\newif\ifseenauthor |
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
+ |
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the |
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. |
+% |
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
+ |
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
+ \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
+ |
+\envdef\titlepage{% |
+ % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. |
+ \begingroup |
+ \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page. |
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue |
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. |
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue |
+ % |
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space |
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. |
+ \let\oldpage = \page |
+ \def\page{% |
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
+ \finishtitlepage |
+ \fi |
+ \let\page = \oldpage |
+ \page |
+ \null |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+\def\Etitlepage{% |
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
+ \finishtitlepage |
+ \fi |
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, |
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. |
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page |
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
+ \oldpage |
+ \endgroup |
+ % |
+ % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are |
+ % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. |
+ \HEADINGSon |
+ % |
+ % If they want short, they certainly want long too. |
+ \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
+ \shortcontents |
+ \contents |
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
+ \global\let\contents = \relax |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
+ \contents |
+ \global\let\contents = \relax |
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\def\finishtitlepage{% |
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue |
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue |
+} |
+ |
+%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: |
+ |
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\title{% |
+ \checkenv\titlepage |
+ \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} |
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also. |
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse |
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt |
+} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\subtitle{% |
+ \checkenv\titlepage |
+ {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% |
+} |
+ |
+% @author should come last, but may come many times. |
+% It can also be used inside @quotation. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\author{% |
+ \def\temp{\quotation}% |
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp |
+ \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. |
+ \else |
+ \checkenv\titlepage |
+ \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi |
+ {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+%%% Set up page headings and footings. |
+ |
+\let\thispage=\folio |
+ |
+\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages |
+\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages |
+\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages |
+\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages |
+ |
+% Now make TeX use those variables |
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
+ \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} |
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline |
+ \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} |
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax |
+ |
+% Commands to set those variables. |
+% For example, this is what @headings on does |
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter |
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle |
+% @evenfooting @thisfile|| |
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile |
+ |
+ |
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
+ |
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% |
+ |
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} |
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
+ |
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
+ \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
+ % |
+ % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume |
+ % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. |
+ \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt |
+ \global\advance\vsize by -12pt |
+} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
+ |
+% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page |
+% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page |
+% |
+% The same set of arguments for: |
+% |
+% @oddheadingmarks |
+% @evenfootingmarks |
+% @oddfootingmarks |
+% @everyheadingmarks |
+% @everyfootingmarks |
+ |
+\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} |
+\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} |
+\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} |
+\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} |
+\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} |
+ \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } |
+\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} |
+ \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } |
+% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. |
+\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% |
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname |
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp |
+} |
+ |
+\everyheadingmarks bottom |
+\everyfootingmarks bottom |
+ |
+% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. |
+% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. |
+% @headings off turns them off. |
+% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. |
+% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. |
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document, |
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. |
+ |
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} |
+ |
+\def\HEADINGSoff{% |
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} |
+\HEADINGSoff |
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. |
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, |
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document |
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top |
+% edge of all pages. |
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
+\global\pageno=1 |
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
+} |
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
+ |
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, |
+% page number on top right. |
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
+\global\pageno=1 |
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
+} |
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} |
+ |
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} |
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter |
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% |
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
+} |
+ |
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} |
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% |
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
+} |
+ |
+% Subroutines used in generating headings |
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output. |
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set |
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). |
+\ifx\today\undefined |
+\def\today{% |
+ \number\day\space |
+ \ifcase\month |
+ \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr |
+ \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug |
+ \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec |
+ \fi |
+ \space\number\year} |
+\fi |
+ |
+% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. |
+% It generates no output of its own. |
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} |
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{tables,} |
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
+ |
+% default indentation of table text |
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in |
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text |
+\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in |
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text. |
+\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in |
+ |
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin |
+\newdimen\itemmax |
+ |
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
+% these defs. |
+% They also define \itemindex |
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). |
+ |
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip |
+ |
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} |
+ |
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} |
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} |
+ |
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % |
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
+ \advance\hsize by -\tableindent |
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
+ \itemindex{#1}% |
+ \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
+ % |
+ % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
+ % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
+ % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
+ % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the |
+ % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. |
+ \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax |
+ % |
+ % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, |
+ % but leave it ragged-right. |
+ \begingroup |
+ \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent |
+ \advance\hsize by\tableindent |
+ \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil |
+ \leavevmode\unhbox0\par |
+ \endgroup |
+ % |
+ % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the |
+ % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. |
+ \nobreak \vskip-\parskip |
+ % |
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
+ % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no |
+ % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would |
+ % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this |
+ % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert |
+ % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. |
+ % |
+ \penalty 10001 |
+ \endgroup |
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
+ \else |
+ % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
+ % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. |
+ \noindent |
+ % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in |
+ % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and |
+ % eventually be printed. |
+ \nobreak\kern-\tableindent |
+ \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 |
+ \unhbox0 |
+ \nobreak\kern\dimen0 |
+ \endgroup |
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} |
+ |
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable. |
+\envdef\table{% |
+ \let\itemindex\gobble |
+ \tablecheck{table}% |
+} |
+\envdef\ftable{% |
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% |
+ \tablecheck{ftable}% |
+} |
+\envdef\vtable{% |
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% |
+ \tablecheck{vtable}% |
+} |
+\def\tablecheck#1{% |
+ \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active |
+ \endgroup |
+ \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is |
+ that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% |
+ \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% |
+ \else |
+ \let\next\tablex |
+ \fi |
+ \next |
+} |
+\def\tablex#1{% |
+ \def\itemindicate{#1}% |
+ \parsearg\tabley |
+} |
+\def\tabley#1{% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% |
+ \expandafter |
+ }\temp \endtablez |
+} |
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% |
+ \aboveenvbreak |
+ \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi |
+ \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi |
+ \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi |
+ \itemmax=\tableindent |
+ \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin |
+ \advance \leftskip by \tableindent |
+ \exdentamount=\tableindent |
+ \parindent = 0pt |
+ \parskip = \smallskipamount |
+ \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi |
+ \let\item = \internalBitem |
+ \let\itemx = \internalBitemx |
+} |
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} |
+\let\Eftable\Etable |
+\let\Evtable\Etable |
+\let\Eitemize\Etable |
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable |
+ |
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize |
+ |
+\newcount \itemno |
+ |
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
+ |
+\def\doitemize#1{% |
+ \aboveenvbreak |
+ \itemmax=\itemindent |
+ \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin |
+ \advance\leftskip by \itemindent |
+ \exdentamount=\itemindent |
+ \parindent=0pt |
+ \parskip=\smallskipamount |
+ \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi |
+ \def\itemcontents{#1}% |
+ % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. |
+ \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi |
+ \let\item=\itemizeitem |
+} |
+ |
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. |
+% |
+\def\itemizeitem{% |
+ \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations |
+ {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break |
+ {% |
+ % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a |
+ % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have |
+ % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero |
+ % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the |
+ % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there |
+ % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much |
+ % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least |
+ % that's the theory. |
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi |
+ \noindent |
+ \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% |
+ \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. |
+ \flushcr |
+} |
+ |
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in |
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. |
+% |
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% |
+ |
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, |
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No |
+% argument is the same as `1'. |
+% |
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
+ % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. |
+ \def\thearg{#1}% |
+ \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi |
+ % |
+ % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a |
+ % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. |
+ % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. |
+ % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at |
+ % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) |
+ \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark |
+ \ifx\rest\empty |
+ % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. |
+ % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. |
+ % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and |
+ % not equal to itself. |
+ % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. |
+ % |
+ % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from |
+ % continuing to look for a <number>. |
+ % |
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax |
+ \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) |
+ \else |
+ % It's a letter. |
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax |
+ \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter |
+ \else |
+ \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. |
+ \numericenumerate |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is |
+% given in \thearg. |
+% |
+\def\numericenumerate{% |
+ \itemno = \thearg |
+ \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% |
+} |
+ |
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. |
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{% |
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
+ \startenumeration{% |
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
+ \ifnum\itemno=0 |
+ \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
+ alphabet}% |
+ \fi |
+ \char\lccode\itemno |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. |
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{% |
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
+ \startenumeration{% |
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
+ \ifnum\itemno=0 |
+ \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
+ alphabet} |
+ \fi |
+ \char\uccode\itemno |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
+% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. |
+% |
+\def\startenumeration#1{% |
+ \advance\itemno by -1 |
+ \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
+} |
+ |
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg |
+% to @enumerate. |
+% |
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} |
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} |
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
+ |
+ |
+% @multitable macros |
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 |
+% |
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. |
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width |
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, |
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. |
+ |
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. |
+ |
+% To make preamble: |
+% |
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
+% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 |
+% @item ... |
+% |
+% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total |
+% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many |
+% columns as desired. |
+ |
+ |
+% Or use a template: |
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
+% @item ... |
+% using the widest term desired in each column. |
+ |
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
+ |
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
+% if they are. |
+ |
+% Sample multitable: |
+ |
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
+% @item |
+% first col stuff |
+% @tab |
+% second col stuff |
+% @tab |
+% third col |
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
+% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
+% |
+% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
+% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
+% @end multitable |
+ |
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. |
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. |
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline |
+% to baseline. |
+% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. |
+% |
+\newskip\multitableparskip |
+\newskip\multitableparindent |
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace |
+\newskip\multitablelinespace |
+\multitableparskip=0pt |
+\multitableparindent=6pt |
+\multitablecolspace=12pt |
+\multitablelinespace=0pt |
+ |
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
+% |
+\let\endsetuptable\relax |
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
+\let\columnfractions\relax |
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} |
+\newif\ifsetpercent |
+ |
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
+% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. |
+% |
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% |
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
+ \setuptable |
+} |
+ |
+\newcount\colcount |
+\def\setuptable#1{% |
+ \def\firstarg{#1}% |
+ \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable |
+ \let\go = \relax |
+ \else |
+ \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions |
+ \global\setpercenttrue |
+ \else |
+ \ifsetpercent |
+ \let\go\pickupwholefraction |
+ \else |
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
+ \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
+ % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction |
+ % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so |
+ % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. |
+ \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% |
+ \else |
+ \let\go = \setuptable |
+ \fi% |
+ \fi |
+ \go |
+} |
+ |
+% multitable-only commands. |
+% |
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. |
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group |
+% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. |
+\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% |
+% |
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template |
+% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until |
+% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. |
+% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. |
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% |
+ |
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: |
+% |
+\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
+% |
+\envdef\multitable{% |
+ \vskip\parskip |
+ \startsavinginserts |
+ % |
+ % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. |
+ % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries |
+ % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka |
+ % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. |
+ \def\item{\crcr}% |
+ % |
+ \tolerance=9500 |
+ \hbadness=9500 |
+ \setmultitablespacing |
+ \parskip=\multitableparskip |
+ \parindent=\multitableparindent |
+ \overfullrule=0pt |
+ \global\colcount=0 |
+ % |
+ \everycr = {% |
+ \noalign{% |
+ \global\everytab={}% |
+ \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. |
+ % Check for saved footnotes, etc. |
+ \checkinserts |
+ % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
+ %\filbreak |
+ % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the |
+ % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the |
+ % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. |
+ }% |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ \parsearg\domultitable |
+} |
+\def\domultitable#1{% |
+ % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
+ \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable |
+ % |
+ % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
+ % be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
+ % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
+ % continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
+ \halign\bgroup &% |
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
+ \multistrut |
+ \vtop{% |
+ % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: |
+ \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
+ % |
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after |
+ % the first one. |
+ % |
+ % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace |
+ % to the width of each template entry. |
+ % |
+ % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will |
+ % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip |
+ % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at |
+ % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. |
+ % |
+ % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. |
+ \rightskip=0pt |
+ \ifnum\colcount=1 |
+ % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. |
+ \advance\hsize by\leftskip |
+ \else |
+ \ifsetpercent \else |
+ % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
+ % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. |
+ \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace |
+ \fi |
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: |
+ \leftskip=\multitablecolspace |
+ \fi |
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious |
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the |
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. |
+ % For example: |
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 |
+ % @item @code{#} |
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. |
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively |
+ % marking characters. |
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut |
+ }\cr |
+} |
+\def\Emultitable{% |
+ \crcr |
+ \egroup % end the \halign |
+ \global\setpercentfalse |
+} |
+ |
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% |
+ \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing |
+ % |
+ % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in |
+ % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on |
+ % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. |
+ % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. |
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip |
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 |
+\fi |
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
+%% table. If not, do nothing. |
+%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. |
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
+ %% than skip between lines in the table. |
+\fi% |
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt |
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
+ %% than skip between lines in the table. |
+\fi} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{conditionals,} |
+ |
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, |
+% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't |
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we |
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't |
+% attempt to close an environment group. |
+% |
+\def\makecond#1{% |
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax |
+ \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 |
+} |
+\makecond{iftex} |
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook} |
+\makecond{ifnothtml} |
+\makecond{ifnotinfo} |
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext} |
+\makecond{ifnotxml} |
+ |
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. |
+% |
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} |
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} |
+\def\html{\doignore{html}} |
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} |
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} |
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
+ |
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. |
+% |
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting. |
+\newcount\doignorecount |
+ |
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
+ % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
+ \obeylines |
+ \catcode`\@ = \other |
+ \catcode`\{ = \other |
+ \catcode`\} = \other |
+ % |
+ % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
+ \spaceisspace |
+ % |
+ % Count number of #1's that we've seen. |
+ \doignorecount = 0 |
+ % |
+ % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. |
+ \dodoignore{#1}% |
+} |
+ |
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. |
+ \obeylines % |
+ % |
+ \gdef\dodoignore#1{% |
+ % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. |
+ % |
+ % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. |
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% |
+ \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% |
+ % |
+ % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a |
+ % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for |
+ % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) |
+ \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% |
+ % |
+ % And now expand that command. |
+ \doignoretext ^^M% |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. |
+ \let\next\doignoretextzzz |
+ \else % Found a nested condition, ... |
+ \advance\doignorecount by 1 |
+ \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. |
+ % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). |
+ \fi |
+ \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. |
+} |
+ |
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". |
+% |
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% |
+ \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. |
+ \let\next\enddoignore |
+ \else % Still inside a nested condition. |
+ \advance\doignorecount by -1 |
+ \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. |
+ \fi |
+ \next |
+} |
+ |
+% Finish off ignored text. |
+{ \obeylines% |
+ % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim |
+ % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional |
+ % would result in a blank line in the output. |
+ \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. |
+% |
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
+% didn't need it. |
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \def\temp{#2}% |
+ \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty |
+ \next{}% |
+ \else |
+ \setzzz#2\endsetzzz |
+ \fi |
+ }% |
+} |
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} |
+ |
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\clear{% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} |
+{ |
+ \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
+ % |
+ \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% |
+ \let\value = \expandablevalue |
+ % We don't want these characters active, ... |
+ \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other |
+ % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if |
+ % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. |
+ % So \let them to their normal equivalents. |
+ \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore |
+ } |
+} |
+ |
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's |
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since |
+% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the |
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain |
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work |
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). |
+% |
+\def\expandablevalue#1{% |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
+ {[No value for ``#1'']}% |
+ \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
+ \else |
+ \csname SET#1\endcsname |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
+% with @set. |
+% |
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
+% |
+\makecond{ifset} |
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} |
+\def\doifset#1#2{% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \let\next=\empty |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax |
+ #1% If not set, redefine \next. |
+ \fi |
+ \expandafter |
+ }\next |
+} |
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} |
+ |
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been |
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. |
+% |
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, |
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. |
+% |
+\makecond{ifclear} |
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} |
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} |
+ |
+% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file |
+% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. |
+\let\dircategory=\comment |
+ |
+% @defininfoenclose. |
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment |
+ |
+ |
+\message{indexing,} |
+% Index generation facilities |
+ |
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite |
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} |
+ |
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. |
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that |
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. |
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for |
+% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
+% for the sake of vms. |
+% |
+\def\newindex#1{% |
+ \iflinks |
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
+ \fi |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index |
+ \noexpand\doindex{#1}} |
+} |
+ |
+% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
+% |
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} |
+ |
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
+% |
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
+% |
+\def\newcodeindex#1{% |
+ \iflinks |
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 |
+ \fi |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% |
+ \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
+% |
+% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
+% inside @code. |
+% |
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} |
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} |
+ |
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), |
+% #3 the target index (bar). |
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% |
+ % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up |
+ % closing the target index. |
+ \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax |
+ % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the |
+ % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. |
+ \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
+ \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 |
+ \fi |
+ % redefine \fooindfile: |
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname |
+ \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp |
+ % redefine \fooindex: |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, |
+% and it is "foo", the name of the index. |
+ |
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. |
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. |
+ |
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} |
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. |
+ |
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} |
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} |
+ |
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. |
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} |
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
+ |
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, |
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. |
+% |
+\def\indexdummies{% |
+ \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
+ \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. |
+ \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% |
+ % |
+ % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
+ % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes |
+ % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. |
+ \let\{ = \mylbrace |
+ \let\} = \myrbrace |
+ % |
+ % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is |
+ % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts |
+ % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, |
+ % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput |
+ % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput |
+ % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that |
+ % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it |
+ % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that |
+ % is still getting written without apparent harm. |
+ % |
+ % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to |
+ % help-texinfo, 22may06): |
+ % @macro funindex {WORD} |
+ % @findex xyz |
+ % @end macro |
+ % ... |
+ % @funindex commtest |
+ % |
+ % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. |
+ % |
+ % Sample whatsit resulting: |
+ % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} |
+ % |
+ % So: |
+ \let\endinput = \empty |
+ % |
+ % Do the redefinitions. |
+ \commondummies |
+} |
+ |
+% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to |
+% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of |
+% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, |
+% this will be simpler. |
+% |
+\def\atdummies{% |
+ \def\@{@@}% |
+ \def\ {@ }% |
+ \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd |
+ \let\} = \rbraceatcmd |
+ % |
+ % Do the redefinitions. |
+ \commondummies |
+ \otherbackslash |
+} |
+ |
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. |
+% |
+\def\commondummies{% |
+ % |
+ % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively |
+ % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, |
+ % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for |
+ % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word |
+ % from whatever follows. |
+ % |
+ % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the |
+ % space. |
+ % |
+ % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and |
+ % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then |
+ % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). |
+ % |
+ \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% |
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% |
+ \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter |
+ % |
+ \commondummiesnofonts |
+ % |
+ \definedummyletter\_% |
+ % |
+ % Non-English letters. |
+ \definedummyword\AA |
+ \definedummyword\AE |
+ \definedummyword\L |
+ \definedummyword\OE |
+ \definedummyword\O |
+ \definedummyword\aa |
+ \definedummyword\ae |
+ \definedummyword\l |
+ \definedummyword\oe |
+ \definedummyword\o |
+ \definedummyword\ss |
+ \definedummyword\exclamdown |
+ \definedummyword\questiondown |
+ \definedummyword\ordf |
+ \definedummyword\ordm |
+ % |
+ % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. |
+ \definedummyword\bf |
+ \definedummyword\gtr |
+ \definedummyword\hat |
+ \definedummyword\less |
+ \definedummyword\sf |
+ \definedummyword\sl |
+ \definedummyword\tclose |
+ \definedummyword\tt |
+ % |
+ \definedummyword\LaTeX |
+ \definedummyword\TeX |
+ % |
+ % Assorted special characters. |
+ \definedummyword\bullet |
+ \definedummyword\comma |
+ \definedummyword\copyright |
+ \definedummyword\registeredsymbol |
+ \definedummyword\dots |
+ \definedummyword\enddots |
+ \definedummyword\equiv |
+ \definedummyword\error |
+ \definedummyword\euro |
+ \definedummyword\guillemetleft |
+ \definedummyword\guillemetright |
+ \definedummyword\guilsinglleft |
+ \definedummyword\guilsinglright |
+ \definedummyword\expansion |
+ \definedummyword\minus |
+ \definedummyword\ogonek |
+ \definedummyword\pounds |
+ \definedummyword\point |
+ \definedummyword\print |
+ \definedummyword\quotedblbase |
+ \definedummyword\quotedblleft |
+ \definedummyword\quotedblright |
+ \definedummyword\quoteleft |
+ \definedummyword\quoteright |
+ \definedummyword\quotesinglbase |
+ \definedummyword\result |
+ \definedummyword\textdegree |
+ % |
+ % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. |
+ \macrolist |
+ % |
+ \normalturnoffactive |
+ % |
+ % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any |
+ % (non-fully-expandable) commands. |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+} |
+ |
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. |
+% |
+\def\commondummiesnofonts{% |
+ % Control letters and accents. |
+ \definedummyletter\!% |
+ \definedummyaccent\"% |
+ \definedummyaccent\'% |
+ \definedummyletter\*% |
+ \definedummyaccent\,% |
+ \definedummyletter\.% |
+ \definedummyletter\/% |
+ \definedummyletter\:% |
+ \definedummyaccent\=% |
+ \definedummyletter\?% |
+ \definedummyaccent\^% |
+ \definedummyaccent\`% |
+ \definedummyaccent\~% |
+ \definedummyword\u |
+ \definedummyword\v |
+ \definedummyword\H |
+ \definedummyword\dotaccent |
+ \definedummyword\ogonek |
+ \definedummyword\ringaccent |
+ \definedummyword\tieaccent |
+ \definedummyword\ubaraccent |
+ \definedummyword\udotaccent |
+ \definedummyword\dotless |
+ % |
+ % Texinfo font commands. |
+ \definedummyword\b |
+ \definedummyword\i |
+ \definedummyword\r |
+ \definedummyword\sc |
+ \definedummyword\t |
+ % |
+ % Commands that take arguments. |
+ \definedummyword\acronym |
+ \definedummyword\cite |
+ \definedummyword\code |
+ \definedummyword\command |
+ \definedummyword\dfn |
+ \definedummyword\emph |
+ \definedummyword\env |
+ \definedummyword\file |
+ \definedummyword\kbd |
+ \definedummyword\key |
+ \definedummyword\math |
+ \definedummyword\option |
+ \definedummyword\pxref |
+ \definedummyword\ref |
+ \definedummyword\samp |
+ \definedummyword\strong |
+ \definedummyword\tie |
+ \definedummyword\uref |
+ \definedummyword\url |
+ \definedummyword\var |
+ \definedummyword\verb |
+ \definedummyword\w |
+ \definedummyword\xref |
+} |
+ |
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index |
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all |
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string |
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument). |
+% |
+\def\indexnofonts{% |
+ % Accent commands should become @asis. |
+ \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% |
+ % We can just ignore other control letters. |
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% |
+ % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. |
+ \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent |
+ % |
+ \commondummiesnofonts |
+ % |
+ % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command |
+ % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. |
+ % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. |
+ %\let\tt=\asis |
+ % |
+ \def\ { }% |
+ \def\@{@}% |
+ % how to handle braces? |
+ \def\_{\normalunderscore}% |
+ % |
+ % Non-English letters. |
+ \def\AA{AA}% |
+ \def\AE{AE}% |
+ \def\L{L}% |
+ \def\OE{OE}% |
+ \def\O{O}% |
+ \def\aa{aa}% |
+ \def\ae{ae}% |
+ \def\l{l}% |
+ \def\oe{oe}% |
+ \def\o{o}% |
+ \def\ss{ss}% |
+ \def\exclamdown{!}% |
+ \def\questiondown{?}% |
+ \def\ordf{a}% |
+ \def\ordm{o}% |
+ % |
+ \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% |
+ \def\TeX{TeX}% |
+ % |
+ % Assorted special characters. |
+ % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) |
+ \def\bullet{bullet}% |
+ \def\comma{,}% |
+ \def\copyright{copyright}% |
+ \def\registeredsymbol{R}% |
+ \def\dots{...}% |
+ \def\enddots{...}% |
+ \def\equiv{==}% |
+ \def\error{error}% |
+ \def\euro{euro}% |
+ \def\guillemetleft{<<}% |
+ \def\guillemetright{>>}% |
+ \def\guilsinglleft{<}% |
+ \def\guilsinglright{>}% |
+ \def\expansion{==>}% |
+ \def\minus{-}% |
+ \def\pounds{pounds}% |
+ \def\point{.}% |
+ \def\print{-|}% |
+ \def\quotedblbase{"}% |
+ \def\quotedblleft{"}% |
+ \def\quotedblright{"}% |
+ \def\quoteleft{`}% |
+ \def\quoteright{'}% |
+ \def\quotesinglbase{,}% |
+ \def\result{=>}% |
+ \def\textdegree{degrees}% |
+ % |
+ % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). |
+ % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. |
+ % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up |
+ % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry |
+ % that starts with \. |
+ % |
+ % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them |
+ % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that |
+ % goes to end-of-line is not handled. |
+ % |
+ \macrolist |
+} |
+ |
+\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? |
+ |
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. |
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} |
+ |
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. |
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- |
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly). |
+% |
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% |
+ \iflinks |
+ {% |
+ % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). |
+ \toks0 = {#2}% |
+ % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. |
+ \def\thirdarg{#3}% |
+ \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else |
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% |
+ % |
+ \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: |
+% |
+\def\dosubindwrite{% |
+ % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
+ \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else |
+ \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Remember, we are within a group. |
+ \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
+ \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
+ % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. |
+ % |
+ % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to |
+ % get the string to sort by. |
+ {\indexnofonts |
+ \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion |
+ \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and |
+ % the original text, including any font commands. We write |
+ % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the |
+ % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s |
+ % sorted result. |
+ \edef\temp{% |
+ \write\writeto{% |
+ \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% |
+ }% |
+ \temp |
+} |
+ |
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: |
+% |
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it |
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting |
+% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the |
+% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that |
+% sequences like this: |
+% @end defun |
+% @tindex whatever |
+% @defun ... |
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the |
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of |
+% the previous defun. |
+% |
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We |
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. |
+% |
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. |
+% |
+% But wait, there is a catch there: |
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not |
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts |
+% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual |
+% representation of the skip. |
+% |
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that |
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). |
+% |
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} |
+% |
+\newskip\whatsitskip |
+\newcount\whatsitpenalty |
+% |
+% ..., ready, GO: |
+% |
+\def\safewhatsit#1{% |
+\ifhmode |
+ #1% |
+\else |
+ % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. |
+ \whatsitskip = \lastskip |
+ \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% |
+ \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty |
+ % |
+ % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a |
+ % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this |
+ % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a |
+ % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential |
+ % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. |
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro |
+ \else |
+ \vskip-\whatsitskip |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ #1% |
+ % |
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro |
+ % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and |
+ % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want |
+ % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various |
+ % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any |
+ % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: |
+ % |
+ % @deffn deffn-whatever |
+ % @vindex index-whatever |
+ % Description. |
+ % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit |
+ % and the "Description." paragraph. |
+ \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi |
+ \else |
+ % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, |
+ % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item |
+ % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. |
+ \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip |
+ \fi |
+\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
+% or |
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} |
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files |
+% containing these kinds of lines: |
+% \initial {c} |
+% before the first topic whose initial is c |
+% \entry {topic}{pagelist} |
+% for a topic that is used without subtopics |
+% \primary {topic} |
+% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics |
+% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} |
+% for each subtopic. |
+ |
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands |
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. |
+ |
+\def\findex {\fnindex} |
+\def\kindex {\kyindex} |
+\def\cindex {\cpindex} |
+\def\vindex {\vrindex} |
+\def\tindex {\tpindex} |
+\def\pindex {\pgindex} |
+ |
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} |
+{\obeylines % |
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % |
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} |
+ |
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
+ |
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. |
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). |
+% |
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
+ \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
+ % |
+ \smallfonts \rm |
+ \tolerance = 9500 |
+ \plainfrenchspacing |
+ \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
+ % |
+ % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
+ % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains |
+ % \initial {@} |
+ % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces |
+ % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). |
+ \catcode`\@ = 11 |
+ \openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
+ \ifeof 1 |
+ % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
+ % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the |
+ % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
+ % there is some text. |
+ \putwordIndexNonexistent |
+ \else |
+ % |
+ % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
+ % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so |
+ % it can discover if there is anything in it. |
+ \read 1 to \temp |
+ \ifeof 1 |
+ \putwordIndexIsEmpty |
+ \else |
+ % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape |
+ % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change |
+ % to make right now. |
+ \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
+ \catcode`\\ = 0 |
+ \escapechar = `\\ |
+ \begindoublecolumns |
+ \input \jobname.#1s |
+ \enddoublecolumns |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
+ |
+\def\initial#1{{% |
+ % Some minor font changes for the special characters. |
+ \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
+ % |
+ % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. |
+ \removelastskip |
+ % |
+ % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. |
+ \nobreak |
+ \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip |
+ \penalty 0 |
+ \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip |
+ % |
+ % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of |
+ % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column |
+ % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch |
+ % we need before each entry, but it's better. |
+ % |
+ % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. |
+ \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip |
+ \leftline{\secbf #1}% |
+ % Do our best not to break after the initial. |
+ \nobreak |
+ \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
+}} |
+ |
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index |
+% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
+% |
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this: |
+% \def\entry#1#2{... |
+% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to |
+% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- |
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. |
+% |
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. |
+% --kasal, 21nov03 |
+\def\entry{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ % |
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
+ % affect previous text. |
+ \par |
+ % |
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space. |
+ \parfillskip = 0in |
+ % |
+ % No extra space above this paragraph. |
+ \parskip = 0in |
+ % |
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. |
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0 |
+ % |
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number |
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the |
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large |
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across |
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. |
+ % |
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
+ \hangindent = 2em |
+ % |
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
+ % with blank space. |
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
+ % |
+ % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing |
+ % columns. |
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt |
+ % |
+ % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): |
+ \afterassignment\doentry |
+ \let\temp = |
+} |
+\def\doentry{% |
+ \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. |
+ \noindent |
+ \aftergroup\finishentry |
+ % And now comes the text of the entry. |
+} |
+\def\finishentry#1{% |
+ % #1 is the page number. |
+ % |
+ % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be |
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon. |
+ \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% |
+ \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt |
+ \ % |
+ \else |
+ % |
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out |
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the |
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) |
+ \hfil\penalty50 |
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. |
+ % |
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as |
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull |
+ % \hbox ensues. |
+ \ifpdf |
+ \pdfgettoks#1.% |
+ \ \the\toksA |
+ \else |
+ \ #1% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \par |
+ \endgroup |
+} |
+ |
+% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. |
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders |
+ \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} |
+ |
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} |
+ |
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm |
+\def\secondary#1#2{{% |
+ \parfillskip=0in |
+ \parskip=0in |
+ \hangindent=1in |
+ \hangafter=1 |
+ \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill |
+ \ifpdf |
+ \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. |
+ \else |
+ #2 |
+ \fi |
+ \par |
+}} |
+ |
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. |
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, |
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. |
+\catcode`\@=11 |
+ |
+\newbox\partialpage |
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize |
+ |
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns |
+ % Grab any single-column material above us. |
+ \output = {% |
+ % |
+ % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a |
+ % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output |
+ % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is |
+ % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In |
+ % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal |
+ % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this |
+ % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. |
+ \ifvoid\partialpage \else |
+ \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% |
+ % Unvbox the main output page. |
+ \unvbox\PAGE |
+ \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip |
+ }% |
+ }% |
+ \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage |
+ % |
+ % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. |
+ \output = {\doublecolumnout}% |
+ % |
+ % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
+ % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
+ % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
+ % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
+ % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. |
+ % |
+ % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
+ % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
+ % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
+ % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) |
+ % as it did when we hard-coded it. |
+ % |
+ % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
+ % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
+ % been clobbered. |
+ % |
+ \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize |
+ \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize |
+ \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 |
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
+ % |
+ % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
+ % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
+ \vsize = 2\vsize |
+} |
+ |
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except |
+% the last. |
+% |
+\def\doublecolumnout{% |
+ \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
+ % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal |
+ % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the |
+ % previous page. |
+ \dimen@ = \vsize |
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2 |
+ \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage |
+ % |
+ % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. |
+ \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ |
+ \onepageout\pagesofar |
+ \unvbox255 |
+ \penalty\outputpenalty |
+} |
+% |
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, |
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. |
+\def\pagesofar{% |
+ \unvbox\partialpage |
+ % |
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
+ \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize |
+ \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% |
+} |
+% |
+% All done with double columns. |
+\def\enddoublecolumns{% |
+ % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised |
+ % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the |
+ % following situation: |
+ % |
+ % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. |
+ % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no |
+ % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last |
+ % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not |
+ % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following |
+ % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject |
+ % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output |
+ % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last |
+ % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which |
+ % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with |
+ % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as |
+ % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page |
+ % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the |
+ % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page |
+ % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final |
+ % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after |
+ % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns |
+ % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see |
+ % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. |
+ % |
+ % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the |
+ % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). |
+ \penalty0 |
+ % |
+ \output = {% |
+ % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the |
+ % current page, no automatic page break. |
+ \balancecolumns |
+ % |
+ % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, |
+ % though, there will be another page break right after this \output |
+ % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not |
+ % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal |
+ % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be |
+ % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes |
+ % the output somewhat more palatable.) |
+ \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% |
+ }% |
+ \eject |
+ \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns |
+ % |
+ % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted |
+ % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column |
+ % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the |
+ % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). |
+ \pagegoal = \vsize |
+} |
+% |
+% Called at the end of the double column material. |
+\def\balancecolumns{% |
+ \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. |
+ \dimen@ = \ht0 |
+ \advance\dimen@ by \topskip |
+ \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to |
+ %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% |
+ \splittopskip = \topskip |
+ % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. |
+ {% |
+ \vbadness = 10000 |
+ \loop |
+ \global\setbox3 = \copy0 |
+ \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ |
+ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ |
+ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt |
+ \repeat |
+ }% |
+ %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% |
+ \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% |
+ \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% |
+ % |
+ \pagesofar |
+} |
+\catcode`\@ = \other |
+ |
+ |
+\message{sectioning,} |
+% Chapters, sections, etc. |
+ |
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered |
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf |
+% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter |
+% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 |
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) |
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 |
+\newcount\chapno |
+\newcount\secno \secno=0 |
+\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 |
+\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
+ |
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
+\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
+% |
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple |
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual |
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
+% |
+\def\appendixletter{% |
+ \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% |
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% |
+ % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is |
+ % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not |
+ % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out |
+ % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. |
+ \else\char\the\appendixno |
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
+ |
+% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number |
+% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use |
+% these. @section does likewise. |
+\def\thischapter{} |
+\def\thischapternum{} |
+\def\thischaptername{} |
+\def\thissection{} |
+\def\thissectionnum{} |
+\def\thissectionname{} |
+ |
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
+ |
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. |
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} |
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name |
+ |
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. |
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} |
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name |
+ |
+% we only have subsub. |
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 |
+% |
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. |
+% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: |
+\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel |
+% |
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: |
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. |
+\def\chapheadtype{N} |
+ |
+% Choose a heading macro |
+% #1 is heading type |
+% #2 is heading level |
+% #3 is text for heading |
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{% |
+ % Compute the abs. sec. level: |
+ \absseclevel=#2 |
+ \advance\absseclevel by \secbase |
+ % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: |
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 |
+ \absseclevel = 0 |
+ \else |
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
+ \absseclevel = 3 |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ % The heading type: |
+ \def\headtype{#1}% |
+ \if \headtype U% |
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel |
+ \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ % Check for appendix sections: |
+ \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 |
+ \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% |
+ \else |
+ \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% |
+ \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% |
+ \fi\fi |
+ \fi |
+ % Check for numbered within unnumbered: |
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel |
+ \def\headtype{U}% |
+ \else |
+ \chardef\unmlevel = 3 |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ % Now print the heading: |
+ \if \headtype U% |
+ \ifcase\absseclevel |
+ \unnumberedzzz{#3}% |
+ \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% |
+ \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \if \headtype A% |
+ \ifcase\absseclevel |
+ \appendixzzz{#3}% |
+ \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% |
+ \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \ifcase\absseclevel |
+ \chapterzzz{#3}% |
+ \or \seczzz{#3}% |
+ \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
+} |
+ |
+% an interface: |
+\def\numhead{\genhead N} |
+\def\apphead{\genhead A} |
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} |
+ |
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset |
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. |
+% |
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers |
+% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. |
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty |
+% |
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
+\def\chapterzzz#1{% |
+ % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such |
+ % as an @include file. |
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
+ \global\advance\chapno by 1 |
+ % |
+ % Used for \float. |
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% |
+ \resetallfloatnos |
+ % |
+ \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% |
+ % |
+ % Write the actual heading. |
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% |
+ % |
+ % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. |
+ \global\let\section = \numberedsec |
+ \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
+\def\appendixzzz#1{% |
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
+ \global\advance\appendixno by 1 |
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% |
+ \resetallfloatnos |
+ % |
+ \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% |
+ \message{\appendixnum}% |
+ % |
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% |
+ % |
+ \global\let\section = \appendixsec |
+ \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% |
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
+ \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 |
+ % |
+ % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. |
+ \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty |
+ \resetallfloatnos |
+ % |
+ % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
+ % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX |
+ % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX |
+ % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant |
+ % to be executed, not expanded). |
+ % |
+ % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
+ % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
+ % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
+ % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for |
+ % the toc entries.) |
+ \toks0 = {#1}% |
+ \message{(\the\toks0)}% |
+ % |
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% |
+ % |
+ \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
+ \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
+} |
+ |
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. |
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% |
+ % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break |
+ % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. |
+ % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 |
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters |
+ \unnmhead0{#1}% |
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax |
+} |
+ |
+% @top is like @unnumbered. |
+\let\top\unnumbered |
+ |
+% Sections. |
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
+\def\seczzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% |
+} |
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Subsections. |
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% |
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% |
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Subsubsections. |
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% |
+ {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% |
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% |
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% |
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
+} |
+ |
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according |
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). |
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. |
+\let\section = \numberedsec |
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
+ |
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
+ |
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: |
+% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
+% overlong headings to fold. |
+% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
+% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. |
+% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and |
+% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. |
+ |
+\def\majorheading{% |
+ {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% |
+ \parsearg\chapheadingzzz |
+} |
+ |
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} |
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% |
+ {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright |
+ \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% |
+ \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax |
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
+} |
+ |
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. |
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
+ |
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only |
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), |
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. |
+ |
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) |
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} |
+ |
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) |
+ |
+\newskip\chapheadingskip |
+ |
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} |
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} |
+% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will |
+% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't |
+% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. |
+\def\chapoddpage{% |
+ \chappager |
+ \ifodd\pageno \else |
+ \begingroup |
+ \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% |
+ \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% |
+ \hbox to 0pt{}% |
+ \chappager |
+ \endgroup |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
+ |
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{% |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
+ |
+\def\CHAPPAGon{% |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} |
+ |
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage |
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage |
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} |
+ |
+\CHAPPAGon |
+ |
+% Chapter opening. |
+% |
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, |
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. |
+% |
+% To test against our argument. |
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} |
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} |
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} |
+% |
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% |
+ % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
+ \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
+ \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
+ \gdef\thissection{}}% |
+ % |
+ \def\temptype{#2}% |
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
+ \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
+ \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
+ \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
+ \gdef\thischapter{}}% |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
+ \toks0={#1}% |
+ \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: |
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
+ }% |
+ \else |
+ \toks0={#1}% |
+ \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: |
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+ % |
+ % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
+ % the preceding space. |
+ \safewhatsit\domark |
+ % |
+ % Insert the chapter heading break. |
+ \pchapsepmacro |
+ % |
+ % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
+ % between here and the heading. |
+ \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
+ \domark |
+ % |
+ {% |
+ \chapfonts \rmisbold |
+ % |
+ % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the |
+ % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called |
+ % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. |
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
+ % |
+ % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix |
+ % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. |
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
+ \def\toctype{unnchap}% |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry |
+ \def\toctype{omit}% |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% |
+ \def\toctype{app}% |
+ \else |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% |
+ \def\toctype{numchap}% |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+ % |
+ % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the |
+ % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc |
+ % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. |
+ \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% |
+ % |
+ % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make |
+ % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has |
+ % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the |
+ % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not |
+ % being visible, for instance under high magnification. |
+ \donoderef{#2}% |
+ % |
+ % Typeset the actual heading. |
+ \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. |
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
+ \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
+ \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
+ }% |
+ \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title |
+ \nobreak |
+} |
+ |
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. |
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax |
+\def\centerparameters{% |
+ \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip |
+ \leftskip = \rightskip |
+ \parfillskip = 0pt |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not |
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. |
+% |
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} |
+% |
+\def\unnchfopen #1{% |
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright |
+ \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
+} |
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% |
+\par\penalty 5000 % |
+} |
+\def\centerchfopen #1{% |
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
+ \parindent=0pt |
+ \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
+} |
+\def\CHAPFopen{% |
+ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen |
+ \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} |
+ |
+ |
+% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and |
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. |
+% |
+\newskip\secheadingskip |
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
+ |
+% Subsection titles. |
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip |
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} |
+ |
+% Subsubsection titles. |
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} |
+ |
+ |
+% Print any size, any type, section title. |
+% |
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is |
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the |
+% section number. |
+% |
+\def\seckeyword{sec} |
+% |
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% |
+ {% |
+ % Switch to the right set of fonts. |
+ \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold |
+ % |
+ \def\sectionlevel{#2}% |
+ \def\temptype{#3}% |
+ % |
+ % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
+ \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
+ \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
+ % Don't redefine \thissection. |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
+ \toks0={#1}% |
+ \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
+ \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
+ \toks0={#1}% |
+ \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
+ \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+ % |
+ % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
+ % the preceding space. |
+ \safewhatsit\domark |
+ % |
+ % Insert space above the heading. |
+ \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname |
+ % |
+ % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
+ % between here and the heading. |
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
+ \domark |
+ % |
+ % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. |
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
+ \def\toctype{unn}% |
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
+ % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, |
+ % and don't redefine \lastsection. |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
+ \def\toctype{omit}% |
+ \let\sectionlevel=\empty |
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% |
+ \def\toctype{app}% |
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
+ \else |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% |
+ \def\toctype{num}% |
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+ % |
+ % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. |
+ \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% |
+ % |
+ % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
+ % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. |
+ \donoderef{#3}% |
+ % |
+ % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. |
+ % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be |
+ % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the |
+ % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that |
+ % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the |
+ % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. |
+ \nobreak |
+ % |
+ % Output the actual section heading. |
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
+ \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
+ \unhbox0 #1}% |
+ }% |
+ % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
+ % Don't allow stretch, though. |
+ \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname |
+ % |
+ % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it |
+ % was followed by glue. |
+ \nobreak |
+ % |
+ % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that |
+ % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a |
+ % discardable item.) |
+ \vskip-\parskip |
+ % |
+ % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > |
+ % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after |
+ % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: |
+ % |
+ % @section sec-whatever |
+ % @deffn def-whatever |
+ \penalty 10001 |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{toc,} |
+% Table of contents. |
+\newwrite\tocfile |
+ |
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. |
+% Called from @chapter, etc. |
+% |
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} |
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional |
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually |
+% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the |
+% destination to jump to. |
+% |
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or |
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. |
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the |
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves. |
+% |
+\newif\iftocfileopened |
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
+% |
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% |
+ \edef\writetoctype{#1}% |
+ \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else |
+ \iftocfileopened\else |
+ \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc |
+ \global\tocfileopenedtrue |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \iflinks |
+ {\atdummies |
+ \edef\temp{% |
+ \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
+ \temp |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're |
+ % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't |
+ % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered |
+ % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first |
+ % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named |
+ % `1', and two named `2'. |
+ \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman |
+% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant |
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. |
+% |
+\def\activecatcodes{% |
+ \catcode`\"=\active |
+ \catcode`\$=\active |
+ \catcode`\<=\active |
+ \catcode`\>=\active |
+ \catcode`\\=\active |
+ \catcode`\^=\active |
+ \catcode`\_=\active |
+ \catcode`\|=\active |
+ \catcode`\~=\active |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. |
+\def\readtocfile{% |
+ \setupdatafile |
+ \activecatcodes |
+ \input \tocreadfilename |
+} |
+ |
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
+\newcount\savepageno |
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 |
+ |
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
+% |
+\def\startcontents#1{% |
+ % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
+ % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain |
+ % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. |
+ % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> |
+ \contentsalignmacro |
+ \immediate\closeout\tocfile |
+ % |
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are. |
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% |
+ % |
+ \savepageno = \pageno |
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
+ % |
+ % Roman numerals for page numbers. |
+ \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on |
+% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. |
+% |
+\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} |
+ |
+% Normal (long) toc. |
+% |
+\def\contents{% |
+ \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
+ \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
+ \ifeof 1 \else |
+ \readtocfile |
+ \fi |
+ \vfill \eject |
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
+ \ifeof 1 \else |
+ \pdfmakeoutlines |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+ \endgroup |
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno |
+} |
+ |
+% And just the chapters. |
+\def\summarycontents{% |
+ \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
+ % |
+ \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry |
+ \let\appentry = \shortchapentry |
+ \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry |
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. |
+ \secfonts |
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf |
+ \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt |
+ \rm |
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000 |
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. |
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} |
+ \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
+ \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
+ \ifeof 1 \else |
+ \readtocfile |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+ \vfill \eject |
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
+ \endgroup |
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno |
+} |
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
+ |
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. |
+% |
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{% |
+ % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the |
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. |
+ % But use \hss just in case. |
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after |
+ % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) |
+ % |
+ % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange |
+ % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and |
+ % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 |
+ % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters |
+ % there are before deciding ... |
+ \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% |
+} |
+ |
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name. |
+% The last argument is the page number. |
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... |
+ |
+% Chapters, in the main contents. |
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
+% |
+% Chapters, in the short toc. |
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. |
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% |
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Appendices, in the main contents. |
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. |
+% |
+\def\appendixbox#1{% |
+ % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% |
+ \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} |
+% |
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
+ |
+% Unnumbered chapters. |
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} |
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} |
+ |
+% Sections. |
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry |
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} |
+ |
+% Subsections. |
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry |
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} |
+ |
+% And subsubsections. |
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry |
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} |
+ |
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. |
+% Same as \defaultparindent. |
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt |
+ |
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the |
+% page number. |
+% |
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters |
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. |
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{% |
+ \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip |
+ \begingroup |
+ \chapentryfonts |
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
+ \endgroup |
+ \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip |
+} |
+ |
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
+ \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent |
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
+ \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent |
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
+ \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent |
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
+\let\tocentry = \entry |
+ |
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. |
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} |
+ |
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
+ |
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} |
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} |
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{environments,} |
+% @foo ... @end foo. |
+ |
+% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. |
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. |
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
+ |
+\envdef\tex{% |
+ \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% |
+ \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
+ \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
+ \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
+ \catcode `\%=14 |
+ \catcode `\+=\other |
+ \catcode `\"=\other |
+ \catcode `\|=\other |
+ \catcode `\<=\other |
+ \catcode `\>=\other |
+ \catcode`\`=\other |
+ \catcode`\'=\other |
+ \escapechar=`\\ |
+ % |
+ \let\b=\ptexb |
+ \let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
+ \let\c=\ptexc |
+ \let\,=\ptexcomma |
+ \let\.=\ptexdot |
+ \let\dots=\ptexdots |
+ \let\equiv=\ptexequiv |
+ \let\!=\ptexexclam |
+ \let\i=\ptexi |
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent |
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent |
+ \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
+ \let\+=\tabalign |
+ \let\}=\ptexrbrace |
+ \let\/=\ptexslash |
+ \let\*=\ptexstar |
+ \let\t=\ptext |
+ \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer |
+ \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
+ % |
+ \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% |
+ \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% |
+ \def\@{@}% |
+} |
+% There is no need to define \Etex. |
+ |
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, |
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). |
+ |
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. |
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in |
+ |
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other |
+% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't |
+% have any width. |
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} |
+ |
+% This space is always present above and below environments. |
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt |
+ |
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here |
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip |
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the |
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
+% |
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{% |
+ % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
+ % \sectionheading, q.v. |
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else |
+ \advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
+ \endgraf |
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount |
+ \removelastskip |
+ % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak |
+ % or better ... |
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi |
+ \vskip\envskipamount |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+}} |
+ |
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak |
+ |
+% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will |
+% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. |
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
+ |
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around |
+% environment contents. |
+\font\circle=lcircle10 |
+\newdimen\circthick |
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip |
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle |
+% |
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth |
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} |
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} |
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} |
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
+ \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr |
+ \hskip\rskip}} |
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
+ \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr |
+ \hskip\rskip}} |
+% |
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip |
+ |
+\envdef\cartouche{% |
+ \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. |
+ \startsavinginserts |
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip |
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. |
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
+ \cartouter=\hsize |
+ \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
+ % side, and for 6pt waste from |
+ % each corner char, and rule thickness |
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
+ \let\nonarrowing = t% |
+ \vbox\bgroup |
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt |
+ \carttop |
+ \hbox\bgroup |
+ \hskip\lskip |
+ \vrule\kern3pt |
+ \vbox\bgroup |
+ \kern3pt |
+ \hsize=\cartinner |
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip |
+ \lineskip=\normlskip |
+ \parskip=\normpskip |
+ \vskip -\parskip |
+ \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. |
+} |
+\def\Ecartouche{% |
+ \ifhmode\par\fi |
+ \kern3pt |
+ \egroup |
+ \kern3pt\vrule |
+ \hskip\rskip |
+ \egroup |
+ \cartbot |
+ \egroup |
+ \checkinserts |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, |
+% inside a group. |
+\def\nonfillstart{% |
+ \aboveenvbreak |
+ \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy |
+ \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. |
+ \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines |
+ \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output |
+ \parskip = 0pt |
+ \parindent = 0pt |
+ \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes |
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
+ \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
+ \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing |
+ \else |
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
+ \fi |
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent |
+} |
+ |
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. |
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. |
+% This affects the following displayed environments: |
+% @example, @display, @format, @lisp |
+% |
+\def\smallword{small} |
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall} |
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax |
+\def\setnormaldispenv{% |
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword |
+ % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank |
+ % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but |
+ % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient |
+ % to change the fonts afterward. |
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi |
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm |
+ \fi |
+} |
+\def\setsmalldispenv{% |
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword |
+ \else |
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi |
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
+% Let's do it by one command: |
+\def\makedispenv #1#2{ |
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} |
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} |
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak |
+ \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak |
+} |
+ |
+% Define two synonyms: |
+\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ |
+ \makedispenv{#1}{#3} |
+ \makedispenv{#2}{#3} |
+} |
+ |
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. |
+% |
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. |
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
+% |
+\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% |
+ \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
+ \gobble % eat return |
+} |
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
+% |
+\makedispenv {display}{% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ \gobble |
+} |
+ |
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
+% |
+\makedispenv{format}{% |
+ \let\nonarrowing = t% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ \gobble |
+} |
+ |
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. |
+\envdef\flushleft{% |
+ \let\nonarrowing = t% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ \gobble |
+} |
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak |
+ |
+% @flushright. |
+% |
+\envdef\flushright{% |
+ \let\nonarrowing = t% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
+ \gobble |
+} |
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
+ |
+ |
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
+% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
+% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and |
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. |
+% |
+\def\quotationstart{% |
+ {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
+ \parindent=0pt |
+ % |
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. |
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
+ \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
+ \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing |
+ \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing |
+ \else |
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
+ \fi |
+ \parsearg\quotationlabel |
+} |
+ |
+\envdef\quotation{% |
+ \setnormaldispenv |
+ \quotationstart |
+} |
+ |
+\envdef\smallquotation{% |
+ \setsmalldispenv |
+ \quotationstart |
+} |
+\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation |
+ |
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're |
+% doing normal filling. |
+% |
+\def\Equotation{% |
+ \par |
+ \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else |
+ % indent a bit. |
+ \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% |
+ \fi |
+ {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% |
+} |
+ |
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. |
+\def\quotationlabel#1{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else |
+ {\bf #1: }% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} |
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, |
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: |
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org |
+% |
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. |
+% |
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
+% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a |
+% verbatim line. |
+\def\dospecials{% |
+ \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% |
+ \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% |
+ \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% |
+ % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and |
+ % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and |
+ % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. |
+ %\do\`\do\'% |
+} |
+% |
+% [Knuth] p. 380 |
+\def\uncatcodespecials{% |
+ \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} |
+% |
+% Setup for the @verb command. |
+% |
+% Eight spaces for a tab |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active |
+ \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} |
+\endgroup |
+% |
+\def\setupverb{% |
+ \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% |
+ \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% |
+ \tabeightspaces |
+ % Respect line breaks, |
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and |
+ % make each space count |
+ % must do in this order: |
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces |
+} |
+ |
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment |
+% |
+% Real tab expansion |
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount |
+% |
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} |
+% |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active |
+ \gdef\tabexpand{% |
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active |
+ \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup |
+ \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab |
+ \divide\dimen0 by\tabw |
+ \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw |
+ \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw |
+ \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox |
+ }% |
+ } |
+\endgroup |
+ |
+% start the verbatim environment. |
+\def\setupverbatim{% |
+ \let\nonarrowing = t% |
+ \nonfillstart |
+ % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
+ \tt |
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% |
+ \tabexpand |
+ \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% |
+ % Respect line breaks, |
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and |
+ % make each space count |
+ % must do in this order: |
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces |
+ \everypar{\starttabbox}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
+% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a |
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: |
+% |
+% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} |
+% |
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other |
+ \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] |
+\endgroup |
+% |
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} |
+% |
+% |
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that |
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: |
+% |
+% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} |
+% |
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, |
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': |
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. |
+% |
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] |
+% |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\ =\active |
+ \obeylines % |
+ % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end |
+ % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank |
+ % line in the output. |
+ \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% |
+ % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but |
+ % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. |
+\endgroup |
+% |
+\envdef\verbatim{% |
+ \setupverbatim\doverbatim |
+} |
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak |
+ |
+ |
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. |
+% |
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} |
+% |
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% |
+ {% |
+ \makevalueexpandable |
+ \setupverbatim |
+ \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
+ \input #1 |
+ \afterenvbreak |
+ }% |
+} |
+ |
+% @copying ... @end copying. |
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. |
+% |
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. |
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the |
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done |
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source |
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as |
+% possible is very desirable. |
+% |
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} |
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} |
+% |
+\def\insertcopying{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page |
+ \scanexp\copyingtext |
+ \endgroup |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{defuns,} |
+% @defun etc. |
+ |
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt |
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt |
+\newcount\defunpenalty |
+ |
+% Start the processing of @deffn: |
+\def\startdefun{% |
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 |
+ \medbreak |
+ \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the |
+ % following @def command, see below. |
+ \else |
+ % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, |
+ % which is there to keep the function description together with its |
+ % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a |
+ % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted |
+ % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning |
+ % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow |
+ % a break between a section heading and a defun. |
+ % |
+ % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling |
+ % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the |
+ % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following |
+ % @def command. |
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi |
+ % |
+ % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. |
+ % But do insert the glue. |
+ \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \parindent=0in |
+ \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
+} |
+ |
+\def\dodefunx#1{% |
+ % First, check whether we are in the right environment: |
+ \checkenv#1% |
+ % |
+ % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. |
+ % It's not a great place, though. |
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi |
+ % |
+ % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: |
+ \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% |
+} |
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} |
+ |
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} |
+% |
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ % call \deffnheader: |
+ #1#2 \endheader |
+ % common ending: |
+ \interlinepenalty = 10000 |
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
+ \endgraf |
+ \nobreak\vskip -\parskip |
+ \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx |
+ % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, |
+ % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. |
+ \checkparencounts |
+ \endgroup |
+} |
+ |
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
+ |
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; |
+% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. |
+% |
+\def\makedefun#1{% |
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun |
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun |
+ \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% |
+ \temp |
+} |
+ |
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader |
+% |
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. |
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. |
+% |
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% |
+ \envdef#1{% |
+ \startdefun |
+ \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% |
+ }% |
+ \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% |
+ \def#3% |
+} |
+ |
+%%% Untyped functions: |
+ |
+% @deffn category name args |
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} |
+ |
+% @deffn category class name args |
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} |
+ |
+% \defopon {category on}class name args |
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
+ |
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args |
+% |
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% |
+ % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. |
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% |
+ \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% |
+} |
+ |
+%%% Typed functions: |
+ |
+% @deftypefn category type name args |
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} |
+ |
+% @deftypeop category class type name args |
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} |
+ |
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args |
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
+ |
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args |
+% |
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% |
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% |
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% |
+} |
+ |
+%%% Typed variables: |
+ |
+% @deftypevr category type var args |
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} |
+ |
+% @deftypecv category class type var args |
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} |
+ |
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args |
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
+ |
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args |
+% |
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% |
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% |
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% |
+} |
+ |
+%%% Untyped variables: |
+ |
+% @defvr category var args |
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } |
+ |
+% @defcv category class var args |
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} |
+ |
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args |
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } |
+ |
+%%% Type: |
+% @deftp category name args |
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% |
+ \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% |
+ \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: |
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } |
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } |
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } |
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } |
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } |
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } |
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } |
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} |
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} |
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} |
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} |
+ |
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). |
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function". |
+% #2 is the return type, if any. |
+% #3 is the function name. |
+% |
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. |
+% |
+\def\defname#1#2#3{% |
+ % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... |
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
+ % |
+ % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps |
+ % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line |
+ % just below it. |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} |
+ % |
+ % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. |
+ % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, |
+ % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: |
+ \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip |
+ % The continuations: |
+ \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent |
+ % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) |
+ \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 |
+ % |
+ % Put the type name to the right margin. |
+ \noindent |
+ \hbox to 0pt{% |
+ \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize |
+ % \hsize has to be shortened this way: |
+ \kern\leftskip |
+ % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: |
+ \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
+ {% |
+ % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: |
+ % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. |
+ % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's |
+ % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in |
+ % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. |
+ % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. |
+ % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no |
+ % one has made identifiers using them :). |
+ \df \tt |
+ \def\temp{#2}% return value type |
+ \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi |
+ #3% output function name |
+ }% |
+ {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm |
+ % |
+ \boldbrax |
+ % arguments will be output next, if any. |
+} |
+ |
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using |
+% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in |
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very |
+% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. |
+% |
+\def\defunargs#1{% |
+ % use sl by default (not ttsl), |
+ % tt for the names. |
+ \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 |
+ % |
+ % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we |
+ % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. |
+ \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% |
+ #1% |
+ \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 |
+} |
+ |
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. |
+% |
+\def\activeparens{% |
+ \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active |
+ \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active |
+ \catcode`\&=\active |
+} |
+ |
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. |
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) |
+ |
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, |
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, |
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. |
+{ |
+ \activeparens |
+ \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen |
+ \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack |
+ \global\let& = \& |
+ |
+ \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
+ \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} |
+} |
+ |
+\newcount\parencount |
+ |
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
+\newif\ifampseen |
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} |
+ |
+\def\parenfont{% |
+ \ifampseen |
+ % At the first level, print parens in roman, |
+ % otherwise use the default font. |
+ \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi |
+ \else |
+ % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than |
+ % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . |
+ \sf |
+ \fi |
+} |
+\def\infirstlevel#1{% |
+ \ifampseen |
+ \ifnum\parencount=1 |
+ #1% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+} |
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} |
+ |
+\def\opnr{% |
+ \global\advance\parencount by 1 |
+ {\parenfont(}% |
+ \infirstlevel \bfafterword |
+} |
+\def\clnr{% |
+ {\parenfont)}% |
+ \infirstlevel \sl |
+ \global\advance\parencount by -1 |
+} |
+ |
+\newcount\brackcount |
+\def\lbrb{% |
+ \global\advance\brackcount by 1 |
+ {\bf[}% |
+} |
+\def\rbrb{% |
+ {\bf]}% |
+ \global\advance\brackcount by -1 |
+} |
+ |
+\def\checkparencounts{% |
+ \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi |
+ \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi |
+} |
+% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually |
+% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). |
+\def\badparencount{% |
+ \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% |
+ \global\parencount=0 |
+} |
+\def\badbrackcount{% |
+ \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% |
+ \global\brackcount=0 |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{macros,} |
+% @macro. |
+ |
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, |
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. |
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
+ \newwrite\macscribble |
+ \def\scantokens#1{% |
+ \toks0={#1}% |
+ \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp |
+ \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% |
+ \immediate\closeout\macscribble |
+ \input \jobname.tmp |
+ } |
+\fi |
+ |
+\def\scanmacro#1{% |
+ \begingroup |
+ \newlinechar`\^^M |
+ \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces |
+ % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex |
+ % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active |
+ % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had |
+ % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears |
+ % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 |
+ \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ |
+ % ... and \example |
+ \spaceisspace |
+ % |
+ % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. |
+ % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX |
+ % --kasal, 29nov03 |
+ \scantokens{#1\endinput}% |
+ \endgroup |
+} |
+ |
+\def\scanexp#1{% |
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% |
+ \temp |
+} |
+ |
+\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters |
+\newtoks\macname % Macro name |
+\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? |
+ |
+% List of all defined macros in the form |
+% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... |
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split |
+% if there is a need. |
+\def\macrolist{} |
+ |
+% Add the macro to \macrolist |
+\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} |
+\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% |
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% |
+ \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Utility routines. |
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
+% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname |
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games). |
+% |
+\def\cslet#1#2{% |
+ \expandafter\let |
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname |
+ \csname#2\endcsname |
+} |
+ |
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. |
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). |
+{\catcode`\@=11 |
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} |
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} |
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} |
+\def\unbrace#1{#1} |
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} |
+} |
+ |
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. |
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% |
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% |
+} |
+ |
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where |
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active |
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. |
+ |
+% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate |
+% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to |
+% confine the change to the current group. |
+ |
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is |
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro |
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. |
+ |
+\def\scanctxt{% |
+ \catcode`\"=\other |
+ \catcode`\+=\other |
+ \catcode`\<=\other |
+ \catcode`\>=\other |
+ \catcode`\@=\other |
+ \catcode`\^=\other |
+ \catcode`\_=\other |
+ \catcode`\|=\other |
+ \catcode`\~=\other |
+ \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\def\scanargctxt{% |
+ \scanctxt |
+ \catcode`\\=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other |
+} |
+ |
+\def\macrobodyctxt{% |
+ \scanctxt |
+ \catcode`\{=\other |
+ \catcode`\}=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other |
+ \usembodybackslash |
+} |
+ |
+\def\macroargctxt{% |
+ \scanctxt |
+ \catcode`\\=\other |
+} |
+ |
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. |
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N |
+% where N is the macro parameter number. |
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so |
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. |
+ |
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active |
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} |
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} |
+} |
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} |
+ |
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} |
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} |
+ |
+\def\macroxxx#1{% |
+ \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist |
+ \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments |
+ \paramno=0% |
+ \else |
+ \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% |
+ \fi |
+ \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname |
+ \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% |
+ \else |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax |
+ \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
+ \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% |
+ \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% |
+ \fi |
+ \begingroup \macrobodyctxt |
+ \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody |
+ \else \expandafter\parsemacbody |
+ \fi} |
+ |
+\parseargdef\unmacro{% |
+ \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
+ \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% |
+ \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% |
+ % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
+ \begingroup |
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
+ \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo |
+ \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% |
+ \endgroup |
+ \else |
+ \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. |
+% |
+\def\unmacrodo#1{% |
+ \ifx #1\relax |
+ % remove this |
+ \else |
+ \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by |
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. |
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} |
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} |
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} |
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} |
+ |
+% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist |
+% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah |
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. |
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). |
+ |
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. |
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something |
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine |
+% it to # just before using the token list produced. |
+% |
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before |
+% the macro is used. |
+ |
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% |
+ \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} |
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% |
+ \if#1;\let\next=\relax |
+ \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx |
+ \advance\paramno by 1% |
+ \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname |
+ {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% |
+ \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% |
+ \fi\next} |
+ |
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. |
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) |
+ |
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% |
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% |
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
+ |
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and |
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. |
+% Much magic with \expandafter here. |
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file |
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. |
+\def\defmacro{% |
+ \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars |
+ \ifrecursive |
+ \ifcase\paramno |
+ % 0 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
+ \or % 1 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
+ \noexpand\braceorline |
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
+ \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
+ \else % many |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
+ \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
+ \expandafter\expandafter |
+ \expandafter\xdef |
+ \expandafter\expandafter |
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
+ \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \ifcase\paramno |
+ % 0 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
+ \or % 1 |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
+ \noexpand\braceorline |
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
+ \egroup |
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
+ \else % many |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
+ \expandafter\expandafter |
+ \expandafter\xdef |
+ \expandafter\expandafter |
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
+ \paramlist{% |
+ \egroup |
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi} |
+ |
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} |
+ |
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a |
+% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole |
+% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence |
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) |
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
+\def\braceorlinexxx{% |
+ \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else |
+ \expandafter\parsearg |
+ \fi \macnamexxx} |
+ |
+ |
+% @alias. |
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal |
+% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. |
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} |
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% |
+ {% |
+ \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty |
+ \addtomacrolist{#1}% |
+ \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% |
+ }% |
+ \next |
+} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{cross references,} |
+ |
+\newwrite\auxfile |
+\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
+ |
+% @inforef is relatively simple. |
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
+ node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
+ |
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
+% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and |
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: |
+% @node foo , bar , ... |
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} |
+% |
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: |
+% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs |
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} |
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
+ |
+\let\nwnode=\node |
+\let\lastnode=\empty |
+ |
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the |
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). |
+% |
+\def\donoderef#1{% |
+ \ifx\lastnode\empty\else |
+ \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% |
+ \global\let\lastnode=\empty |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. |
+% |
+\newcount\savesfregister |
+% |
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} |
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} |
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} |
+ |
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an |
+% anchor), which consists of three parts: |
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, |
+% or the anchor name. |
+% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or |
+% empty for anchors. |
+% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. |
+% |
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of |
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: |
+% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. |
+% |
+\def\setref#1#2{% |
+ \pdfmkdest{#1}% |
+ \iflinks |
+ {% |
+ \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them |
+ \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% |
+ \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef |
+ ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef |
+ }% |
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% |
+ \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% |
+ \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. |
+ \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is |
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed |
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed |
+% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. |
+% |
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup |
+ \unsepspaces |
+ \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
+ \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% |
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% |
+ \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
+ % No printed node name was explicitly given. |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax |
+ % Use the node name inside the square brackets. |
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
+ \else |
+ % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
+ % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
+ % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
+ \else |
+ \ifhavexrefs |
+ % We know the real title if we have the xref values. |
+ \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
+ \else |
+ % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. |
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
+ \fi% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Make link in pdf output. |
+ \ifpdf |
+ {\indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ |
+ % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. |
+ \getfilename{#4}% |
+ % |
+ % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. |
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% |
+ \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% |
+ % |
+ \leavevmode |
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
+ \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
+ goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
+ \else |
+ goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
+ \fi |
+ }% |
+ \setcolor{\linkcolor}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" |
+ % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the |
+ % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. |
+ {% |
+ % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to |
+ % include an _ in the xref name, etc. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle |
+ \csname XR#1-title\endcsname |
+ }% |
+ \iffloat\Xthisreftitle |
+ % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, |
+ % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". |
+ \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt |
+ \refx{#1-snt}{}% |
+ \else |
+ \printedrefname |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append |
+ % "in MANUALNAME". |
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
+ \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
+ % |
+ % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not |
+ % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will |
+ % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals |
+ % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this |
+ % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it |
+ % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. |
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
+ \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
+ \else |
+ % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the |
+ % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand |
+ % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
+ % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
+ % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
+ {\turnoffactive |
+ % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for |
+ % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. |
+ \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
+ \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi |
+ }% |
+ % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. |
+ \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname |
+ % |
+ % But we always want a comma and a space: |
+ ,\space |
+ % |
+ % output the `page 3'. |
+ \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \endlink |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
+% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, |
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly |
+% one that Bob is working on :). |
+% |
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} |
+ |
+% Things referred to by \setref. |
+% |
+\def\Ynothing{} |
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{} |
+\def\Ynumbered{% |
+ \ifnum\secno=0 |
+ \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno |
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 |
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno |
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 |
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno |
+ \else |
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+} |
+\def\Yappendix{% |
+ \ifnum\secno=0 |
+ \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% |
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 |
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno |
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 |
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno |
+ \else |
+ \putwordSection@tie |
+ @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. |
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. |
+% |
+\def\refx#1#2{% |
+ {% |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \otherbackslash |
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX |
+ \csname XR#1\endcsname |
+ }% |
+ \ifx\thisrefX\relax |
+ % If not defined, say something at least. |
+ \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright |
+ \iflinks |
+ \ifhavexrefs |
+ \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
+ \else |
+ \ifwarnedxrefs\else |
+ \global\warnedxrefstrue |
+ \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ % It's defined, so just use it. |
+ \thisrefX |
+ \fi |
+ #2% Output the suffix in any case. |
+} |
+ |
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid |
+% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. |
+% |
+\def\xrdef#1#2{% |
+ {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current |
+ % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these |
+ % mess up the control sequence name. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref |
+ % |
+ % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? |
+ \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname |
+ % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. |
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist |
+ \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname |
+ % |
+ % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? |
+ \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax |
+ \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do |
+ \else |
+ % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. |
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, |
+ % for later use in \listoffloats. |
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 |
+ {\safexrefname}}% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
+% |
+\def\tryauxfile{% |
+ \openin 1 \jobname.aux |
+ \ifeof 1 \else |
+ \readdatafile{aux}% |
+ \global\havexrefstrue |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+} |
+ |
+\def\setupdatafile{% |
+ \catcode`\^^@=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^A=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^B=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^C=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^D=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^E=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^F=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^G=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^H=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^K=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^L=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^N=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^P=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^Q=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^R=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^S=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^T=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^U=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^V=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^W=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^X=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^Z=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^[=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^\=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^]=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^^=\other |
+ \catcode`\^^_=\other |
+ % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
+ % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
+ % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, |
+ % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ |
+ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat |
+ % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first |
+ % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could |
+ % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. |
+ % |
+ % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: |
+ % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter |
+ % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. |
+ % |
+ \catcode`\^=\other |
+ % |
+ % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... |
+ \catcode`\~=\other |
+ \catcode`\[=\other |
+ \catcode`\]=\other |
+ \catcode`\"=\other |
+ \catcode`\_=\other |
+ \catcode`\|=\other |
+ \catcode`\<=\other |
+ \catcode`\>=\other |
+ \catcode`\$=\other |
+ \catcode`\#=\other |
+ \catcode`\&=\other |
+ \catcode`\%=\other |
+ \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
+ % |
+ % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ |
+ % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than |
+ % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ |
+ % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* |
+ % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that |
+ % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for |
+ % now. --karl, 15jan04. |
+ \catcode`\\=\other |
+ % |
+ % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. |
+ {% |
+ \count1=128 |
+ \def\loop{% |
+ \catcode\count1=\other |
+ \advance\count1 by 1 |
+ \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi |
+ }% |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. |
+ \catcode`\{=1 |
+ \catcode`\}=2 |
+ \catcode`\@=0 |
+} |
+ |
+\def\readdatafile#1{% |
+\begingroup |
+ \setupdatafile |
+ \input\jobname.#1 |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{insertions,} |
+% including footnotes. |
+ |
+\newcount \footnoteno |
+ |
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is |
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a |
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is |
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a |
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) |
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
+ |
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. |
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment |
+ |
+{\catcode `\@=11 |
+% |
+% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. |
+\gdef\footnote{% |
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent |
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent |
+ \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
+ \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% |
+ % |
+ % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the |
+ % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. |
+ \let\@sf\empty |
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
+ % |
+ % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. |
+ \unskip |
+ \thisfootno\@sf |
+ \dofootnote |
+}% |
+ |
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
+% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
+% |
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when |
+% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
+% |
+\gdef\dofootnote{% |
+ \insert\footins\bgroup |
+ % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
+ % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
+ % So reset some parameters. |
+ \hsize=\pagewidth |
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
+ \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes |
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox |
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM |
+ \leftskip\z@skip |
+ \rightskip\z@skip |
+ \spaceskip\z@skip |
+ \xspaceskip\z@skip |
+ \parindent\defaultparindent |
+ % |
+ \smallfonts \rm |
+ % |
+ % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears |
+ % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use |
+ % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote |
+ % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). |
+ \let\noindent = \relax |
+ % |
+ % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the |
+ % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. |
+ \everypar = {\hang}% |
+ \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
+ % |
+ % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this |
+ % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
+ % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
+ \footstrut |
+ \futurelet\next\fo@t |
+} |
+}%end \catcode `\@=11 |
+ |
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion |
+% would be lost. |
+% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote |
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. |
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. |
+ |
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. |
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled |
+% out prematurely. |
+% |
+\def\startsavinginserts{% |
+ \ifx \insert\ptexinsert |
+ \let\insert\saveinsert |
+ \else |
+ \let\checkinserts\relax |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and |
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. |
+% |
+\def\saveinsert#1{% |
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% |
+ \afterassignment\next |
+ % swallow the left brace |
+ \let\temp = |
+} |
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} |
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} |
+ |
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} |
+ |
+\def\placesaveins#1{% |
+ \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname |
+ {\box#1}% |
+} |
+ |
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: |
+{ |
+ \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) |
+ \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} |
+} |
+ |
+% initialization: |
+\def\newsaveins #1{% |
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% |
+ \next |
+} |
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{% |
+ \csname newbox\endcsname #1% |
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts |
+ \checksaveins #1}% |
+} |
+ |
+% initialize: |
+\let\checkinserts\empty |
+\newsaveins\footins |
+\newsaveins\margin |
+ |
+ |
+% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. |
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. |
+% |
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image |
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get |
+% undone and the next image would fail. |
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex |
+\ifeof 1 \else |
+ % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
+ % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). |
+ \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
+ \input epsf.tex |
+\fi |
+\closein 1 |
+% |
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. |
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf |
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to |
+ work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get |
+ it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} |
+% |
+\def\image#1{% |
+ \ifx\epsfbox\undefined |
+ \ifwarnednoepsf \else |
+ \errhelp = \noepsfhelp |
+ \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% |
+ \global\warnednoepsftrue |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
+ \fi |
+} |
+% |
+% Arguments to @image: |
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. |
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. |
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. |
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. |
+\newif\ifimagevmode |
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example |
+ \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names |
+ % If the image is by itself, center it. |
+ \ifvmode |
+ \imagevmodetrue |
+ \nobreak\medskip |
+ % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert |
+ % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space |
+ % above and below. |
+ \nobreak\vskip\parskip |
+ \nobreak |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing |
+ % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if |
+ % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. |
+ \noindent |
+ % |
+ % Output the image. |
+ \ifpdf |
+ \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
+ \else |
+ % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi |
+ \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image |
+\endgroup} |
+ |
+ |
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
+% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the |
+% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. |
+% |
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} |
+ |
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. |
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} |
+ |
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically |
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, |
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. |
+% |
+% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to |
+% be referable. |
+% |
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It |
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). |
+% |
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each |
+% chapter-level command. |
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty |
+% |
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% |
+ \let\thiscaption=\empty |
+ \let\thisshortcaption=\empty |
+ % |
+ % don't lose footnotes inside @float. |
+ % |
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an |
+ % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 |
+ % |
+ \startsavinginserts |
+ % |
+ % We can't be used inside a paragraph. |
+ \par |
+ % |
+ \vtop\bgroup |
+ \def\floattype{#1}% |
+ \def\floatlabel{#2}% |
+ \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. |
+ % |
+ \ifx\floattype\empty |
+ \let\safefloattype=\empty |
+ \else |
+ {% |
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, |
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. |
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
+ % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, |
+ % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) |
+ % |
+ \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname |
+ \global\advance\floatno by 1 |
+ % |
+ {% |
+ % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the |
+ % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float |
+ % labels (which have a completely different output format) from |
+ % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the |
+ % lists of floats. |
+ % |
+ \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% |
+ \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % start with \parskip glue, I guess. |
+ \vskip\parskip |
+ % |
+ % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. |
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent |
+} |
+ |
+% we have these possibilities: |
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap |
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 |
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap |
+% @float Foo & no caption: Foo |
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap |
+% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 |
+% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap |
+% @float & no caption: |
+% |
+\def\Efloat{% |
+ \let\floatident = \empty |
+ % |
+ % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. |
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi |
+ % |
+ % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. |
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. |
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% |
+ \fi |
+ % the number. |
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in |
+ % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. |
+ \let\captionline = \floatident |
+ % |
+ \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else |
+ \ifx\floatident\empty \else |
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % caption text. |
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. |
+ % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. |
+ \ifx\captionline\empty \else |
+ \vskip.5\parskip |
+ \captionline |
+ % |
+ % Space below caption. |
+ \vskip\parskip |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this |
+ % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. |
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
+ % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as |
+ % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short |
+ % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. |
+ {% |
+ \atdummies |
+ % |
+ % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M |
+ % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so |
+ % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. |
+ \scanexp{% |
+ \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% |
+ \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty |
+ \thiscaption |
+ \else |
+ \thisshortcaption |
+ \fi |
+ }% |
+ }% |
+ \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident |
+ \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% |
+ }% |
+ \fi |
+ \egroup % end of \vtop |
+ % |
+ % place the captured inserts |
+ % |
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning |
+ % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly |
+ % float. --kasal, 26may04 |
+ % |
+ \checkinserts |
+} |
+ |
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. |
+% |
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% |
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% |
+} |
+ |
+% @caption, @shortcaption |
+% |
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} |
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} |
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} |
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} |
+ |
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are |
+% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. |
+\def\getfloatno#1{% |
+ \ifx#1\relax |
+ % Haven't seen this figure type before. |
+ \csname newcount\endcsname #1% |
+ % |
+ % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. |
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos |
+ \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% |
+ \fi |
+ \let\floatno#1% |
+} |
+ |
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref |
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we |
+% first read the @float command. |
+% |
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% |
+ |
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can |
+% distinguish floats from other xref types. |
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} |
+ |
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional |
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic |
+% \lastsection value which we \setref above. |
+% |
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} |
+% |
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the |
+% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. |
+% |
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% |
+ \def\temp{#1}% |
+ \def\iffloattype{#2}% |
+ \ifx\temp\floatmagic |
+} |
+ |
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{% |
+ \def\floattype{#1}% floattype |
+ {% |
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, |
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. |
+ \indexnofonts |
+ \turnoffactive |
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% |
+ }% |
+ % |
+ % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax |
+ \ifhavexrefs |
+ % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. |
+ \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% |
+ \fi |
+ \else |
+ \begingroup |
+ \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc |
+ \let\do=\listoffloatsdo |
+ \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname |
+ \endgroup |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the |
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the |
+% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which |
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. |
+% |
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since |
+% they won't appear in the aux file). |
+% |
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} |
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% |
+ % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just |
+ % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the |
+ % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link |
+ % in pdf output. |
+ \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% |
+ % |
+ % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. |
+ \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% |
+ \writeentry |
+}} |
+ |
+ |
+\message{localization,} |
+ |
+% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very |
+% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language |
+% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. |
+% |
+{ |
+ \catcode`\_ = \active |
+ \globaldefs=1 |
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup |
+ \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames |
+ \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
+ % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. |
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
+ \ifeof 1 |
+ \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% |
+ \else |
+ \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist |
+ \input txi-#1.tex |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+ \endgroup % end raw TeX |
+\endgroup} |
+} |
+% |
+% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, |
+% try txi-de.tex. |
+% |
+\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% |
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
+ \ifeof 1 |
+ \errhelp = \nolanghelp |
+ \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% |
+ \else |
+ \input txi-#1.tex |
+ \fi |
+ \closein 1 |
+} |
+% |
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or |
+is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current |
+directory should work if nowhere else does.} |
+ |
+% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the |
+% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and |
+% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. |
+% |
+% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. |
+% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., |
+% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. |
+% |
+% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all |
+% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in |
+% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the |
+% accented characters problem.) |
+% |
+\catcode`@=11 |
+\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% |
+ % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. |
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax |
+ \message{no patterns for #1}% |
+ \else |
+ \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname |
+ \fi |
+ % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. |
+ \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax |
+ \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax |
+} |
+ |
+% Helpers for encodings. |
+% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. |
+% |
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% |
+ \count255=128 |
+ \loop\ifnum\count255<256 |
+ \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax |
+ \advance\count255 by 1 |
+ \repeat |
+} |
+ |
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% |
+ \count255=128 |
+ \loop\ifnum\count255<256 |
+ \catcode\count255=#1\relax |
+ \advance\count255 by 1 |
+ \repeat |
+} |
+ |
+% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters |
+% according to the specified encoding. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\documentencoding{% |
+ % Encoding being declared for the document. |
+ \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% |
+ % |
+ % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able |
+ % to compare them with \ifx. |
+ \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% |
+ \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% |
+ \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% |
+ \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% |
+ \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% |
+ % |
+ \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii |
+ \asciichardefs |
+ % |
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo |
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
+ \lattwochardefs |
+ % |
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone |
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
+ \latonechardefs |
+ % |
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine |
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
+ \latninechardefs |
+ % |
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight |
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
+ \utfeightchardefs |
+ % |
+ \else |
+ \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% |
+ % |
+ \fi % utfeight |
+ \fi % latnine |
+ \fi % latone |
+ \fi % lattwo |
+ \fi % ascii |
+} |
+ |
+% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available |
+% the default font encoding (OT1). |
+% |
+\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} |
+ |
+% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. |
+\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} |
+ |
+% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be |
+% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of |
+% macros containing the character definitions. |
+\setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
+% |
+% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. |
+\def\latonechardefs{% |
+ \gdef^^a0{~} |
+ \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} |
+ \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} |
+ \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} |
+ \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} |
+ \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} |
+ \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} |
+ \gdef^^a7{\S} |
+ \gdef^^a8{\"{}} |
+ \gdef^^a9{\copyright} |
+ \gdef^^aa{\ordf} |
+ \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} |
+ \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} |
+ \gdef^^ad{\-} |
+ \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} |
+ \gdef^^af{\={}} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} |
+ \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} |
+ \gdef^^b2{$^2$} |
+ \gdef^^b3{$^3$} |
+ \gdef^^b4{\'{}} |
+ \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} |
+ \gdef^^b6{\P} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^b7{$^.$} |
+ \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } |
+ \gdef^^b9{$^1$} |
+ \gdef^^ba{\ordm} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^bb{\guilletright} |
+ \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} |
+ \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} |
+ \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} |
+ \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^c0{\`A} |
+ \gdef^^c1{\'A} |
+ \gdef^^c2{\^A} |
+ \gdef^^c3{\~A} |
+ \gdef^^c4{\"A} |
+ \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} |
+ \gdef^^c6{\AE} |
+ \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} |
+ \gdef^^c8{\`E} |
+ \gdef^^c9{\'E} |
+ \gdef^^ca{\^E} |
+ \gdef^^cb{\"E} |
+ \gdef^^cc{\`I} |
+ \gdef^^cd{\'I} |
+ \gdef^^ce{\^I} |
+ \gdef^^cf{\"I} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} |
+ \gdef^^d1{\~N} |
+ \gdef^^d2{\`O} |
+ \gdef^^d3{\'O} |
+ \gdef^^d4{\^O} |
+ \gdef^^d5{\~O} |
+ \gdef^^d6{\"O} |
+ \gdef^^d7{$\times$} |
+ \gdef^^d8{\O} |
+ \gdef^^d9{\`U} |
+ \gdef^^da{\'U} |
+ \gdef^^db{\^U} |
+ \gdef^^dc{\"U} |
+ \gdef^^dd{\'Y} |
+ \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} |
+ \gdef^^df{\ss} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^e0{\`a} |
+ \gdef^^e1{\'a} |
+ \gdef^^e2{\^a} |
+ \gdef^^e3{\~a} |
+ \gdef^^e4{\"a} |
+ \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} |
+ \gdef^^e6{\ae} |
+ \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} |
+ \gdef^^e8{\`e} |
+ \gdef^^e9{\'e} |
+ \gdef^^ea{\^e} |
+ \gdef^^eb{\"e} |
+ \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} |
+ \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} |
+ \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} |
+ \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} |
+ \gdef^^f1{\~n} |
+ \gdef^^f2{\`o} |
+ \gdef^^f3{\'o} |
+ \gdef^^f4{\^o} |
+ \gdef^^f5{\~o} |
+ \gdef^^f6{\"o} |
+ \gdef^^f7{$\div$} |
+ \gdef^^f8{\o} |
+ \gdef^^f9{\`u} |
+ \gdef^^fa{\'u} |
+ \gdef^^fb{\^u} |
+ \gdef^^fc{\"u} |
+ \gdef^^fd{\'y} |
+ \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} |
+ \gdef^^ff{\"y} |
+} |
+ |
+% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. |
+\def\latninechardefs{% |
+ % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. |
+ \latonechardefs |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^a4{\euro} |
+ \gdef^^a6{\v S} |
+ \gdef^^a8{\v s} |
+ \gdef^^b4{\v Z} |
+ \gdef^^b8{\v z} |
+ \gdef^^bc{\OE} |
+ \gdef^^bd{\oe} |
+ \gdef^^be{\"Y} |
+} |
+ |
+% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. |
+\def\lattwochardefs{% |
+ \gdef^^a0{~} |
+ \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} |
+ \gdef^^a2{\u{}} |
+ \gdef^^a3{\L} |
+ \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} |
+ \gdef^^a5{\v L} |
+ \gdef^^a6{\'S} |
+ \gdef^^a7{\S} |
+ \gdef^^a8{\"{}} |
+ \gdef^^a9{\v S} |
+ \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} |
+ \gdef^^ab{\v T} |
+ \gdef^^ac{\'Z} |
+ \gdef^^ad{\-} |
+ \gdef^^ae{\v Z} |
+ \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} |
+ \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} |
+ \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} |
+ \gdef^^b3{\l} |
+ \gdef^^b4{\'{}} |
+ \gdef^^b5{\v l} |
+ \gdef^^b6{\'s} |
+ \gdef^^b7{\v{}} |
+ \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } |
+ \gdef^^b9{\v s} |
+ \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} |
+ \gdef^^bb{\v t} |
+ \gdef^^bc{\'z} |
+ \gdef^^bd{\H{}} |
+ \gdef^^be{\v z} |
+ \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^c0{\'R} |
+ \gdef^^c1{\'A} |
+ \gdef^^c2{\^A} |
+ \gdef^^c3{\u A} |
+ \gdef^^c4{\"A} |
+ \gdef^^c5{\'L} |
+ \gdef^^c6{\'C} |
+ \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} |
+ \gdef^^c8{\v C} |
+ \gdef^^c9{\'E} |
+ \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} |
+ \gdef^^cb{\"E} |
+ \gdef^^cc{\v E} |
+ \gdef^^cd{\'I} |
+ \gdef^^ce{\^I} |
+ \gdef^^cf{\v D} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} |
+ \gdef^^d1{\'N} |
+ \gdef^^d2{\v N} |
+ \gdef^^d3{\'O} |
+ \gdef^^d4{\^O} |
+ \gdef^^d5{\H O} |
+ \gdef^^d6{\"O} |
+ \gdef^^d7{$\times$} |
+ \gdef^^d8{\v R} |
+ \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} |
+ \gdef^^da{\'U} |
+ \gdef^^db{\H U} |
+ \gdef^^dc{\"U} |
+ \gdef^^dd{\'Y} |
+ \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} |
+ \gdef^^df{\ss} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^e0{\'r} |
+ \gdef^^e1{\'a} |
+ \gdef^^e2{\^a} |
+ \gdef^^e3{\u a} |
+ \gdef^^e4{\"a} |
+ \gdef^^e5{\'l} |
+ \gdef^^e6{\'c} |
+ \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} |
+ \gdef^^e8{\v c} |
+ \gdef^^e9{\'e} |
+ \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} |
+ \gdef^^eb{\"e} |
+ \gdef^^ec{\v e} |
+ \gdef^^ed{\'\i} |
+ \gdef^^ee{\^\i} |
+ \gdef^^ef{\v d} |
+ % |
+ \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} |
+ \gdef^^f1{\'n} |
+ \gdef^^f2{\v n} |
+ \gdef^^f3{\'o} |
+ \gdef^^f4{\^o} |
+ \gdef^^f5{\H o} |
+ \gdef^^f6{\"o} |
+ \gdef^^f7{$\div$} |
+ \gdef^^f8{\v r} |
+ \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} |
+ \gdef^^fa{\'u} |
+ \gdef^^fb{\H u} |
+ \gdef^^fc{\"u} |
+ \gdef^^fd{\'y} |
+ \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} |
+ \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} |
+} |
+ |
+% UTF-8 character definitions. |
+% |
+% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some |
+% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by |
+% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. |
+% |
+\newcount\countUTFx |
+\newcount\countUTFy |
+\newcount\countUTFz |
+ |
+\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter |
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} |
+% |
+\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter |
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} |
+% |
+\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter |
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} |
+ |
+\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% |
+ \ifx #1\relax |
+ \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% |
+ \else |
+ \expandafter #1% |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\~13 |
+ \catcode`\"12 |
+ |
+ \def\UTFviiiLoop{% |
+ \global\catcode\countUTFx\active |
+ \uccode`\~\countUTFx |
+ \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% |
+ \advance\countUTFx by 1 |
+ \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy |
+ \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop |
+ \fi} |
+ |
+ \countUTFx = "C2 |
+ \countUTFy = "E0 |
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} |
+ \UTFviiiLoop |
+ |
+ \countUTFx = "E0 |
+ \countUTFy = "F0 |
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} |
+ \UTFviiiLoop |
+ |
+ \countUTFx = "F0 |
+ \countUTFy = "F4 |
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} |
+ \UTFviiiLoop |
+\endgroup |
+ |
+\begingroup |
+ \catcode`\"=12 |
+ \catcode`\<=12 |
+ \catcode`\.=12 |
+ \catcode`\,=12 |
+ \catcode`\;=12 |
+ \catcode`\!=12 |
+ \catcode`\~=13 |
+ |
+ \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% |
+ \countUTFz = "#1\relax |
+ \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% |
+ \begingroup |
+ \parseXMLCharref |
+ \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% |
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% |
+ \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% |
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% |
+ \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% |
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% |
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter |
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter |
+ \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% |
+ \endgroup} |
+ |
+ \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% |
+ \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax |
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple |
+ \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% |
+ \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax |
+ \parseUTFviiiA,% |
+ \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% |
+ \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax |
+ \parseUTFviiiA;% |
+ \parseUTFviiiA,% |
+ \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% |
+ \else |
+ \parseUTFviiiA;% |
+ \parseUTFviiiA,% |
+ \parseUTFviiiA!% |
+ \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% |
+ \fi\fi\fi |
+ } |
+ |
+ \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% |
+ \countUTFx = \countUTFz |
+ \divide\countUTFz by 64 |
+ \countUTFy = \countUTFz |
+ \multiply\countUTFz by 64 |
+ \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz |
+ \advance\countUTFx by 128 |
+ \uccode `#1\countUTFx |
+ \countUTFz = \countUTFy} |
+ |
+ \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% |
+ \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax |
+ \uccode `#3\countUTFz |
+ \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} |
+\endgroup |
+ |
+\def\utfeightchardefs{% |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} |
+ |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} |
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} |
+}% end of \utfeightchardefs |
+ |
+ |
+% US-ASCII character definitions. |
+\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done |
+ \relax |
+} |
+ |
+% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with |
+% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a |
+% document encoding. |
+% |
+\setnonasciicharscatcode \other |
+ |
+ |
+\message{formatting,} |
+ |
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
+ |
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
+ |
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
+\vbadness = 10000 |
+ |
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. |
+\hbadness = 2000 |
+ |
+% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. |
+\widowpenalty=10000 |
+\clubpenalty=10000 |
+ |
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
+% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. |
+% |
+\def\setemergencystretch{% |
+ \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
+ % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
+ \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
+ \else |
+ \emergencystretch = .15\hsize |
+ \fi |
+} |
+ |
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; |
+% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; |
+% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. |
+% |
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define |
+% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. |
+% |
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% |
+ \voffset = #3\relax |
+ \topskip = #6\relax |
+ \splittopskip = \topskip |
+ % |
+ \vsize = #1\relax |
+ \advance\vsize by \topskip |
+ \outervsize = \vsize |
+ \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin |
+ \pageheight = \vsize |
+ % |
+ \hsize = #2\relax |
+ \outerhsize = \hsize |
+ \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
+ \pagewidth = \hsize |
+ % |
+ \normaloffset = #4\relax |
+ \bindingoffset = #5\relax |
+ % |
+ \ifpdf |
+ \pdfpageheight #7\relax |
+ \pdfpagewidth #8\relax |
+ % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of |
+ % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. |
+ \pdfhorigin = 1 true in |
+ \pdfvorigin = 1 true in |
+ \fi |
+ % |
+ \setleading{\textleading} |
+ % |
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent |
+ \setemergencystretch |
+} |
+ |
+% @letterpaper (the default). |
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
+ \textleading = 13.2pt |
+ % |
+ % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. |
+ \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines |
+ {\voffset}{.25in}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% |
+ {11in}{8.5in}% |
+}} |
+ |
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. |
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt |
+ \textleading = 12pt |
+ % |
+ \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
+ {-.2in}{0in}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% |
+ {9.25in}{7in}% |
+ % |
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
+ \tolerance = 700 |
+ \hfuzz = 1pt |
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
+ \defbodyindent = .5cm |
+}} |
+ |
+% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. |
+% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) |
+\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt |
+ \textleading = 12pt |
+ % |
+ \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% |
+ {-.2in}{-.4in}% |
+ {0pt}{14pt}% |
+ {9in}{6in}% |
+ % |
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.25in |
+ \tolerance = 700 |
+ \hfuzz = 1pt |
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
+ \defbodyindent = .4cm |
+}} |
+ |
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
+ \textleading = 13.2pt |
+ % |
+ % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 |
+ % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. |
+ % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust |
+ % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then |
+ % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in |
+ % your texinfo source file like this: |
+ % @tex |
+ % \global\normaloffset = -6mm |
+ % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm |
+ % @end tex |
+ \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines |
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
+ {297mm}{210mm}% |
+ % |
+ \tolerance = 700 |
+ \hfuzz = 1pt |
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
+ \defbodyindent = 5mm |
+}} |
+ |
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. |
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. |
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. |
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt |
+ \textleading = 12.5pt |
+ % |
+ \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% |
+ {210mm}{148mm}% |
+ % |
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.2in |
+ \tolerance = 800 |
+ \hfuzz = 1.2pt |
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
+ \defbodyindent = 2mm |
+ \tableindent = 12mm |
+}} |
+ |
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. |
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \afourpaper |
+ \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
+ {\voffset}{4.6mm}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
+ {297mm}{210mm}% |
+ % |
+ % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. |
+ \globaldefs = 0 |
+}} |
+ |
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 |
+ \afourpaper |
+ \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
+ {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
+ {297mm}{210mm}% |
+ \globaldefs = 0 |
+}} |
+ |
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] |
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, |
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. |
+% |
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi |
+ \globaldefs = 1 |
+ % |
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
+ \setleading{\textleading}% |
+ % |
+ \dimen0 = #1\relax |
+ \advance\dimen0 by \voffset |
+ % |
+ \dimen2 = \hsize |
+ \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset |
+ % |
+ \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% |
+ {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% |
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
+ {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% |
+}} |
+ |
+% Set default to letter. |
+% |
+\letterpaper |
+ |
+ |
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
+ |
+% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. |
+\catcode`\^^? = 14 |
+ |
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
+\catcode`\"=\other |
+\catcode`\~=\other |
+\catcode`\^=\other |
+\catcode`\_=\other |
+\catcode`\|=\other |
+\catcode`\<=\other |
+\catcode`\>=\other |
+\catcode`\+=\other |
+\catcode`\$=\other |
+\def\normaldoublequote{"} |
+\def\normaltilde{~} |
+\def\normalcaret{^} |
+\def\normalunderscore{_} |
+\def\normalverticalbar{|} |
+\def\normalless{<} |
+\def\normalgreater{>} |
+\def\normalplus{+} |
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
+ |
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, |
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
+% |
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print |
+% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero |
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all |
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. |
+% |
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
+ |
+% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches |
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from |
+% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway |
+% this is not a problem. |
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
+ |
+% Turn off all special characters except @ |
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). |
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can |
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
+ |
+\catcode`\"=\active |
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} |
+\let"=\activedoublequote |
+\catcode`\~=\active |
+\def~{{\tt\char126}} |
+\chardef\hat=`\^ |
+\catcode`\^=\active |
+\def^{{\tt \hat}} |
+ |
+\catcode`\_=\active |
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} |
+\let\realunder=_ |
+% Subroutine for the previous macro. |
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
+ |
+\catcode`\|=\active |
+\def|{{\tt\char124}} |
+\chardef \less=`\< |
+\catcode`\<=\active |
+\def<{{\tt \less}} |
+\chardef \gtr=`\> |
+\catcode`\>=\active |
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}} |
+\catcode`\+=\active |
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}} |
+\catcode`\$=\active |
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix |
+ |
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file |
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. |
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. |
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. |
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} |
+ |
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after |
+% parsing them. |
+\def\turnoffactive{% |
+ \normalturnoffactive |
+ \otherbackslash |
+} |
+ |
+\catcode`\@=0 |
+ |
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
+% as in \char`\\. |
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ |
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work |
+ |
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and |
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). |
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} |
+ |
+% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash |
+% in fixed width font. |
+\catcode`\\=\active |
+@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} |
+% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: |
+% @let \ = @normalbackslash |
+ |
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. |
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with |
+% catcode other. |
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} |
+@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} |
+ |
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of |
+% the literal character `\'. |
+% |
+@def@normalturnoffactive{% |
+ @let\=@normalbackslash |
+ @let"=@normaldoublequote |
+ @let~=@normaltilde |
+ @let^=@normalcaret |
+ @let_=@normalunderscore |
+ @let|=@normalverticalbar |
+ @let<=@normalless |
+ @let>=@normalgreater |
+ @let+=@normalplus |
+ @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix |
+ @markupsetuplqdefault |
+ @markupsetuprqdefault |
+ @unsepspaces |
+} |
+ |
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. |
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. |
+@otherifyactive |
+ |
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. |
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing |
+% a backslash. |
+% |
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} |
+@global@let\ = @eatinput |
+ |
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then |
+% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input |
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
+% |
+@gdef@fixbackslash{% |
+ @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi |
+ @catcode`+=@active |
+ @catcode`@_=@active |
+} |
+ |
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
+@escapechar = `@@ |
+ |
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
+@catcode`@& = @other |
+@catcode`@# = @other |
+@catcode`@% = @other |
+ |
+@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and |
+@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we |
+@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. |
+@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. |
+@catcode`@'=@active |
+@catcode`@`=@active |
+@markupsetuplqdefault |
+@markupsetuprqdefault |
+ |
+@c Local variables: |
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) |
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" |
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" |
+@c time-stamp-end: "}" |
+@c End: |
+ |
+@c vim:sw=2: |
+ |
+@ignore |
+ arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 |
+@end ignore |